mirror of
https://github.com/wpilibsuite/allwpilib
synced 2026-06-25 01:41:43 +00:00
Moved C++ comments from source files to headers (#1111)
Also sorted functions in C++ sources to match order in related headers.
This commit is contained in:
committed by
Peter Johnson
parent
d9971a705a
commit
8c680a26f8
@@ -33,6 +33,13 @@ class ADXL345_I2C : public ErrorBase,
|
||||
double ZAxis;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Constructs the ADXL345 Accelerometer over I2C.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param port The I2C port the accelerometer is attached to
|
||||
* @param range The range (+ or -) that the accelerometer will measure
|
||||
* @param deviceAddress The I2C address of the accelerometer (0x1D or 0x53)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit ADXL345_I2C(I2C::Port port, Range range = kRange_2G,
|
||||
int deviceAddress = kAddress);
|
||||
~ADXL345_I2C() override = default;
|
||||
@@ -46,7 +53,20 @@ class ADXL345_I2C : public ErrorBase,
|
||||
double GetY() override;
|
||||
double GetZ() override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the acceleration of one axis in Gs.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param axis The axis to read from.
|
||||
* @return Acceleration of the ADXL345 in Gs.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual double GetAcceleration(Axes axis);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the acceleration of all axes in Gs.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return An object containing the acceleration measured on each axis of the
|
||||
* ADXL345 in Gs.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual AllAxes GetAccelerations();
|
||||
|
||||
void InitSendable(SendableBuilder& builder) override;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -32,7 +32,14 @@ class ADXL345_SPI : public ErrorBase,
|
||||
double ZAxis;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Constructor.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param port The SPI port the accelerometer is attached to
|
||||
* @param range The range (+ or -) that the accelerometer will measure
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit ADXL345_SPI(SPI::Port port, Range range = kRange_2G);
|
||||
|
||||
~ADXL345_SPI() override = default;
|
||||
|
||||
ADXL345_SPI(const ADXL345_SPI&) = delete;
|
||||
@@ -44,7 +51,20 @@ class ADXL345_SPI : public ErrorBase,
|
||||
double GetY() override;
|
||||
double GetZ() override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the acceleration of one axis in Gs.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param axis The axis to read from.
|
||||
* @return Acceleration of the ADXL345 in Gs.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual double GetAcceleration(Axes axis);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the acceleration of all axes in Gs.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return An object containing the acceleration measured on each axis of the
|
||||
* ADXL345 in Gs.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual AllAxes GetAccelerations();
|
||||
|
||||
void InitSendable(SendableBuilder& builder) override;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -29,8 +29,21 @@ class ADXL362 : public ErrorBase, public SendableBase, public Accelerometer {
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Constructor. Uses the onboard CS1.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param range The range (+ or -) that the accelerometer will measure.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit ADXL362(Range range = kRange_2G);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Constructor.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param port The SPI port the accelerometer is attached to
|
||||
* @param range The range (+ or -) that the accelerometer will measure.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit ADXL362(SPI::Port port, Range range = kRange_2G);
|
||||
|
||||
virtual ~ADXL362() = default;
|
||||
|
||||
ADXL362(const ADXL362&) = delete;
|
||||
@@ -42,7 +55,20 @@ class ADXL362 : public ErrorBase, public SendableBase, public Accelerometer {
|
||||
double GetY() override;
|
||||
double GetZ() override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the acceleration of one axis in Gs.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param axis The axis to read from.
|
||||
* @return Acceleration of the ADXL362 in Gs.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual double GetAcceleration(Axes axis);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the acceleration of all axes in Gs.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return An object containing the acceleration measured on each axis of the
|
||||
* ADXL362 in Gs.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual AllAxes GetAccelerations();
|
||||
|
||||
void InitSendable(SendableBuilder& builder) override;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -28,13 +28,64 @@ namespace frc {
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class ADXRS450_Gyro : public GyroBase {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Gyro constructor on onboard CS0.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
ADXRS450_Gyro();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Gyro constructor on the specified SPI port.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param port The SPI port the gyro is attached to.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit ADXRS450_Gyro(SPI::Port port);
|
||||
|
||||
virtual ~ADXRS450_Gyro() = default;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Return the actual angle in degrees that the robot is currently facing.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The angle is based on the current accumulator value corrected by the
|
||||
* oversampling rate, the gyro type and the A/D calibration values.
|
||||
* The angle is continuous, that is it will continue from 360->361 degrees.
|
||||
* This allows algorithms that wouldn't want to see a discontinuity in the
|
||||
* gyro output as it sweeps from 360 to 0 on the second time around.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return the current heading of the robot in degrees. This heading is based
|
||||
* on integration of the returned rate from the gyro.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetAngle() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Return the rate of rotation of the gyro
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The rate is based on the most recent reading of the gyro analog value
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return the current rate in degrees per second
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetRate() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Reset the gyro.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Resets the gyro to a heading of zero. This can be used if there is
|
||||
* significant drift in the gyro and it needs to be recalibrated after it has
|
||||
* been running.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Reset() override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Initialize the gyro.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Calibrate the gyro by running for a number of samples and computing the
|
||||
* center value. Then use the center value as the Accumulator center value for
|
||||
* subsequent measurements.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* It's important to make sure that the robot is not moving while the
|
||||
* centering calculations are in progress, this is typically done when the
|
||||
* robot is first turned on while it's sitting at rest before the competition
|
||||
* starts.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Calibrate() override;
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -27,19 +27,85 @@ class AnalogAccelerometer : public ErrorBase,
|
||||
public SendableBase,
|
||||
public PIDSource {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Create a new instance of an accelerometer.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The constructor allocates desired analog input.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param channel The channel number for the analog input the accelerometer is
|
||||
* connected to
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit AnalogAccelerometer(int channel);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Create a new instance of Accelerometer from an existing AnalogInput.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Make a new instance of accelerometer given an AnalogInput. This is
|
||||
* particularly useful if the port is going to be read as an analog channel as
|
||||
* well as through the Accelerometer class.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param channel The existing AnalogInput object for the analog input the
|
||||
* accelerometer is connected to
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit AnalogAccelerometer(AnalogInput* channel);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Create a new instance of Accelerometer from an existing AnalogInput.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Make a new instance of accelerometer given an AnalogInput. This is
|
||||
* particularly useful if the port is going to be read as an analog channel as
|
||||
* well as through the Accelerometer class.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param channel The existing AnalogInput object for the analog input the
|
||||
* accelerometer is connected to
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit AnalogAccelerometer(std::shared_ptr<AnalogInput> channel);
|
||||
|
||||
~AnalogAccelerometer() override = default;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Return the acceleration in Gs.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The acceleration is returned units of Gs.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The current acceleration of the sensor in Gs.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetAcceleration() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the accelerometer sensitivity.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This sets the sensitivity of the accelerometer used for calculating the
|
||||
* acceleration. The sensitivity varies by accelerometer model. There are
|
||||
* constants defined for various models.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param sensitivity The sensitivity of accelerometer in Volts per G.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetSensitivity(double sensitivity);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the voltage that corresponds to 0 G.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The zero G voltage varies by accelerometer model. There are constants
|
||||
* defined for various models.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param zero The zero G voltage.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetZero(double zero);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the Acceleration for the PID Source parent.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The current acceleration in Gs.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double PIDGet() override;
|
||||
|
||||
void InitSendable(SendableBuilder& builder) override;
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Common function for initializing the accelerometer.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void InitAccelerometer();
|
||||
|
||||
std::shared_ptr<AnalogInput> m_analogInput;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -38,21 +38,147 @@ class AnalogGyro : public GyroBase {
|
||||
static constexpr double kCalibrationSampleTime = 5.0;
|
||||
static constexpr double kDefaultVoltsPerDegreePerSecond = 0.007;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Gyro constructor using the Analog Input channel number.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param channel The analog channel the gyro is connected to. Gyros can only
|
||||
* be used on on-board Analog Inputs 0-1.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit AnalogGyro(int channel);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Gyro constructor with a precreated AnalogInput object.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Use this constructor when the analog channel needs to be shared.
|
||||
* This object will not clean up the AnalogInput object when using this
|
||||
* constructor.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Gyros can only be used on on-board channels 0-1.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param channel A pointer to the AnalogInput object that the gyro is
|
||||
* connected to.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit AnalogGyro(AnalogInput* channel);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Gyro constructor with a precreated AnalogInput object.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Use this constructor when the analog channel needs to be shared.
|
||||
* This object will not clean up the AnalogInput object when using this
|
||||
* constructor.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param channel A pointer to the AnalogInput object that the gyro is
|
||||
* connected to.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit AnalogGyro(std::shared_ptr<AnalogInput> channel);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Gyro constructor using the Analog Input channel number with parameters for
|
||||
* presetting the center and offset values. Bypasses calibration.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param channel The analog channel the gyro is connected to. Gyros can only
|
||||
* be used on on-board Analog Inputs 0-1.
|
||||
* @param center Preset uncalibrated value to use as the accumulator center
|
||||
* value.
|
||||
* @param offset Preset uncalibrated value to use as the gyro offset.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
AnalogGyro(int channel, int center, double offset);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Gyro constructor with a precreated AnalogInput object and calibrated
|
||||
* parameters.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Use this constructor when the analog channel needs to be shared.
|
||||
* This object will not clean up the AnalogInput object when using this
|
||||
* constructor.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param channel A pointer to the AnalogInput object that the gyro is
|
||||
* connected to.
|
||||
* @param center Preset uncalibrated value to use as the accumulator center
|
||||
* value.
|
||||
* @param offset Preset uncalibrated value to use as the gyro offset.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
AnalogGyro(std::shared_ptr<AnalogInput> channel, int center, double offset);
|
||||
|
||||
virtual ~AnalogGyro();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Return the actual angle in degrees that the robot is currently facing.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The angle is based on the current accumulator value corrected by the
|
||||
* oversampling rate, the gyro type and the A/D calibration values. The angle
|
||||
* is continuous, that is it will continue from 360->361 degrees. This allows
|
||||
* algorithms that wouldn't want to see a discontinuity in the gyro output as
|
||||
* it sweeps from 360 to 0 on the second time around.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The current heading of the robot in degrees. This heading is based
|
||||
* on integration of the returned rate from the gyro.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetAngle() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Return the rate of rotation of the gyro
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The rate is based on the most recent reading of the gyro analog value
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return the current rate in degrees per second
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetRate() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Return the gyro center value. If run after calibration,
|
||||
* the center value can be used as a preset later.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return the current center value
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual int GetCenter() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Return the gyro offset value. If run after calibration,
|
||||
* the offset value can be used as a preset later.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return the current offset value
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual double GetOffset() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the gyro sensitivity.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This takes the number of volts/degree/second sensitivity of the gyro and
|
||||
* uses it in subsequent calculations to allow the code to work with multiple
|
||||
* gyros. This value is typically found in the gyro datasheet.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param voltsPerDegreePerSecond The sensitivity in Volts/degree/second
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetSensitivity(double voltsPerDegreePerSecond);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the size of the neutral zone.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Any voltage from the gyro less than this amount from the center is
|
||||
* considered stationary. Setting a deadband will decrease the amount of
|
||||
* drift when the gyro isn't rotating, but will make it less accurate.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param volts The size of the deadband in volts
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetDeadband(double volts);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Reset the gyro.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Resets the gyro to a heading of zero. This can be used if there is
|
||||
* significant drift in the gyro and it needs to be recalibrated after it has
|
||||
* been running.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Reset() override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Initialize the gyro.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Calibration is handled by Calibrate().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void InitGyro();
|
||||
|
||||
void Calibrate() override;
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -38,38 +38,243 @@ class AnalogInput : public ErrorBase, public SendableBase, public PIDSource {
|
||||
static constexpr int kAccumulatorNumChannels = 2;
|
||||
static constexpr int kAccumulatorChannels[kAccumulatorNumChannels] = {0, 1};
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Construct an analog input.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param channel The channel number on the roboRIO to represent. 0-3 are
|
||||
* on-board 4-7 are on the MXP port.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit AnalogInput(int channel);
|
||||
|
||||
~AnalogInput() override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get a sample straight from this channel.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The sample is a 12-bit value representing the 0V to 5V range of the A/D
|
||||
* converter in the module. The units are in A/D converter codes. Use
|
||||
* GetVoltage() to get the analog value in calibrated units.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return A sample straight from this channel.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetValue() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get a sample from the output of the oversample and average engine for this
|
||||
* channel.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The sample is 12-bit + the bits configured in SetOversampleBits().
|
||||
* The value configured in SetAverageBits() will cause this value to be
|
||||
* averaged 2**bits number of samples.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This is not a sliding window. The sample will not change until
|
||||
* 2**(OversampleBits + AverageBits) samples have been acquired from the
|
||||
* module on this channel.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Use GetAverageVoltage() to get the analog value in calibrated units.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return A sample from the oversample and average engine for this channel.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetAverageValue() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get a scaled sample straight from this channel.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The value is scaled to units of Volts using the calibrated scaling data
|
||||
* from GetLSBWeight() and GetOffset().
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return A scaled sample straight from this channel.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetVoltage() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get a scaled sample from the output of the oversample and average engine
|
||||
* for this channel.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The value is scaled to units of Volts using the calibrated scaling data
|
||||
* from GetLSBWeight() and GetOffset().
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Using oversampling will cause this value to be higher resolution, but it
|
||||
* will update more slowly.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Using averaging will cause this value to be more stable, but it will update
|
||||
* more slowly.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return A scaled sample from the output of the oversample and average
|
||||
* engine for this channel.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetAverageVoltage() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the channel number.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The channel number.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetChannel() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the number of averaging bits.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This sets the number of averaging bits. The actual number of averaged
|
||||
* samples is 2^bits.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Use averaging to improve the stability of your measurement at the expense
|
||||
* of sampling rate. The averaging is done automatically in the FPGA.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param bits Number of bits of averaging.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetAverageBits(int bits);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the number of averaging bits previously configured.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This gets the number of averaging bits from the FPGA. The actual number of
|
||||
* averaged samples is 2^bits. The averaging is done automatically in the
|
||||
* FPGA.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Number of bits of averaging previously configured.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetAverageBits() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the number of oversample bits.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This sets the number of oversample bits. The actual number of oversampled
|
||||
* values is 2^bits. Use oversampling to improve the resolution of your
|
||||
* measurements at the expense of sampling rate. The oversampling is done
|
||||
* automatically in the FPGA.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param bits Number of bits of oversampling.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetOversampleBits(int bits);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the number of oversample bits previously configured.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This gets the number of oversample bits from the FPGA. The actual number of
|
||||
* oversampled values is 2^bits. The oversampling is done automatically in the
|
||||
* FPGA.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Number of bits of oversampling previously configured.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetOversampleBits() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the factory scaling least significant bit weight constant.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Volts = ((LSB_Weight * 1e-9) * raw) - (Offset * 1e-9)
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Least significant bit weight.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetLSBWeight() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the factory scaling offset constant.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Volts = ((LSB_Weight * 1e-9) * raw) - (Offset * 1e-9)
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Offset constant.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetOffset() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Is the channel attached to an accumulator.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The analog input is attached to an accumulator.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsAccumulatorChannel() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Initialize the accumulator.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void InitAccumulator();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set an initial value for the accumulator.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This will be added to all values returned to the user.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param initialValue The value that the accumulator should start from when
|
||||
* reset.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetAccumulatorInitialValue(int64_t value);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Resets the accumulator to the initial value.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void ResetAccumulator();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the center value of the accumulator.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The center value is subtracted from each A/D value before it is added to
|
||||
* the accumulator. This is used for the center value of devices like gyros
|
||||
* and accelerometers to take the device offset into account when integrating.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This center value is based on the output of the oversampled and averaged
|
||||
* source from the accumulator channel. Because of this, any non-zero
|
||||
* oversample bits will affect the size of the value for this field.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetAccumulatorCenter(int center);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the accumulator's deadband.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetAccumulatorDeadband(int deadband);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Read the accumulated value.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Read the value that has been accumulating.
|
||||
* The accumulator is attached after the oversample and average engine.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The 64-bit value accumulated since the last Reset().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int64_t GetAccumulatorValue() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Read the number of accumulated values.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Read the count of the accumulated values since the accumulator was last
|
||||
* Reset().
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The number of times samples from the channel were accumulated.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int64_t GetAccumulatorCount() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Read the accumulated value and the number of accumulated values atomically.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This function reads the value and count from the FPGA atomically.
|
||||
* This can be used for averaging.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param value Reference to the 64-bit accumulated output.
|
||||
* @param count Reference to the number of accumulation cycles.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetAccumulatorOutput(int64_t& value, int64_t& count) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the sample rate per channel for all analog channels.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The maximum rate is 500kS/s divided by the number of channels in use.
|
||||
* This is 62500 samples/s per channel.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param samplesPerSecond The number of samples per second.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void SetSampleRate(double samplesPerSecond);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the current sample rate for all channels
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Sample rate.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static double GetSampleRate();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the Average value for the PID Source base object.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The average voltage.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double PIDGet() override;
|
||||
|
||||
void InitSendable(SendableBuilder& builder) override;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -19,11 +19,34 @@ namespace frc {
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class AnalogOutput : public ErrorBase, public SendableBase {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Construct an analog output on the given channel.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* All analog outputs are located on the MXP port.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param channel The channel number on the roboRIO to represent.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit AnalogOutput(int channel);
|
||||
|
||||
~AnalogOutput() override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the value of the analog output.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param voltage The output value in Volts, from 0.0 to +5.0
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetVoltage(double voltage);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the voltage of the analog output
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The value in Volts, from 0.0 to +5.0
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetVoltage() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the channel of this AnalogOutput.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetChannel();
|
||||
|
||||
void InitSendable(SendableBuilder& builder) override;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ class AnalogPotentiometer : public ErrorBase,
|
||||
public Potentiometer {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* AnalogPotentiometer constructor.
|
||||
* Construct an Analog Potentiometer object from a channel number.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Use the fullRange and offset values so that the output produces meaningful
|
||||
* values. I.E: you have a 270 degree potentiometer and you want the output to
|
||||
@@ -38,18 +38,57 @@ class AnalogPotentiometer : public ErrorBase,
|
||||
* This will calculate the result from the fullRange times the fraction of the
|
||||
* supply voltage, plus the offset.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param channel The analog channel this potentiometer is plugged into.
|
||||
* @param fullRange The scaling to multiply the voltage by to get a meaningful
|
||||
* unit.
|
||||
* @param offset The offset to add to the scaled value for controlling the
|
||||
* zero value.
|
||||
* @param channel The channel number on the roboRIO to represent. 0-3 are
|
||||
* on-board 4-7 are on the MXP port.
|
||||
* @param fullRange The angular value (in desired units) representing the full
|
||||
* 0-5V range of the input.
|
||||
* @param offset The angular value (in desired units) representing the
|
||||
* angular output at 0V.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit AnalogPotentiometer(int channel, double fullRange = 1.0,
|
||||
double offset = 0.0);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Construct an Analog Potentiometer object from an existing Analog Input
|
||||
* pointer.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Use the fullRange and offset values so that the output produces meaningful
|
||||
* values. I.E: you have a 270 degree potentiometer and you want the output to
|
||||
* be degrees with the halfway point as 0 degrees. The fullRange value is
|
||||
* 270.0 degrees and the offset is -135.0 since the halfway point after
|
||||
* scaling is 135 degrees.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This will calculate the result from the fullRange times the fraction of the
|
||||
* supply voltage, plus the offset.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param channel The existing Analog Input pointer
|
||||
* @param fullRange The angular value (in desired units) representing the full
|
||||
* 0-5V range of the input.
|
||||
* @param offset The angular value (in desired units) representing the
|
||||
* angular output at 0V.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit AnalogPotentiometer(AnalogInput* input, double fullRange = 1.0,
|
||||
double offset = 0.0);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Construct an Analog Potentiometer object from an existing Analog Input
|
||||
* pointer.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Use the fullRange and offset values so that the output produces meaningful
|
||||
* values. I.E: you have a 270 degree potentiometer and you want the output to
|
||||
* be degrees with the halfway point as 0 degrees. The fullRange value is
|
||||
* 270.0 degrees and the offset is -135.0 since the halfway point after
|
||||
* scaling is 135 degrees.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This will calculate the result from the fullRange times the fraction of the
|
||||
* supply voltage, plus the offset.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param channel The existing Analog Input pointer
|
||||
* @param fullRange The angular value (in desired units) representing the full
|
||||
* 0-5V range of the input.
|
||||
* @param offset The angular value (in desired units) representing the
|
||||
* angular output at 0V.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit AnalogPotentiometer(std::shared_ptr<AnalogInput> input,
|
||||
double fullRange = 1.0, double offset = 0.0);
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -58,7 +97,8 @@ class AnalogPotentiometer : public ErrorBase,
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the current reading of the potentiomer.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The current position of the potentiometer.
|
||||
* @return The current position of the potentiometer (in the units used for
|
||||
* fullRange and offset).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double Get() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -23,17 +23,109 @@ class AnalogTrigger : public ErrorBase, public SendableBase {
|
||||
friend class AnalogTriggerOutput;
|
||||
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Constructor for an analog trigger given a channel number.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param channel The channel number on the roboRIO to represent. 0-3 are
|
||||
* on-board 4-7 are on the MXP port.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit AnalogTrigger(int channel);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Construct an analog trigger given an analog input.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This should be used in the case of sharing an analog channel between the
|
||||
* trigger and an analog input object.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param channel The pointer to the existing AnalogInput object
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit AnalogTrigger(AnalogInput* channel);
|
||||
|
||||
~AnalogTrigger() override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the upper and lower limits of the analog trigger.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The limits are given as floating point voltage values.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param lower The lower limit of the trigger in Volts.
|
||||
* @param upper The upper limit of the trigger in Volts.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetLimitsVoltage(double lower, double upper);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the upper and lower limits of the analog trigger.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The limits are given in ADC codes. If oversampling is used, the units must
|
||||
* be scaled appropriately.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param lower The lower limit of the trigger in ADC codes (12-bit values).
|
||||
* @param upper The upper limit of the trigger in ADC codes (12-bit values).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetLimitsRaw(int lower, int upper);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Configure the analog trigger to use the averaged vs. raw values.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* If the value is true, then the averaged value is selected for the analog
|
||||
* trigger, otherwise the immediate value is used.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param useAveragedValue If true, use the Averaged value, otherwise use the
|
||||
* instantaneous reading
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetAveraged(bool useAveragedValue);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Configure the analog trigger to use a filtered value.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The analog trigger will operate with a 3 point average rejection filter.
|
||||
* This is designed to help with 360 degree pot applications for the period
|
||||
* where the pot crosses through zero.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param useFilteredValue If true, use the 3 point rejection filter,
|
||||
* otherwise use the unfiltered value
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetFiltered(bool useFilteredValue);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Return the index of the analog trigger.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This is the FPGA index of this analog trigger instance.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The index of the analog trigger.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetIndex() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Return the InWindow output of the analog trigger.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* True if the analog input is between the upper and lower limits.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return True if the analog input is between the upper and lower limits.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetInWindow();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Return the TriggerState output of the analog trigger.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* True if above upper limit.
|
||||
* False if below lower limit.
|
||||
* If in Hysteresis, maintain previous state.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return True if above upper limit. False if below lower limit. If in
|
||||
* Hysteresis, maintain previous state.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetTriggerState();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Creates an AnalogTriggerOutput object.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Gets an output object that can be used for routing. Caller is responsible
|
||||
* for deleting the AnalogTriggerOutput object.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param type An enum of the type of output object to create.
|
||||
* @return A pointer to a new AnalogTriggerOutput object.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
std::shared_ptr<AnalogTriggerOutput> CreateOutput(
|
||||
AnalogTriggerType type) const;
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -51,17 +51,49 @@ class AnalogTriggerOutput : public DigitalSource {
|
||||
|
||||
public:
|
||||
~AnalogTriggerOutput() override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the state of the analog trigger output.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The state of the analog trigger output.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Get() const;
|
||||
|
||||
// DigitalSource interface
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* @return The HAL Handle to the specified source.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
HAL_Handle GetPortHandleForRouting() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* @return The type of analog trigger output to be used.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
AnalogTriggerType GetAnalogTriggerTypeForRouting() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Is source an AnalogTrigger
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsAnalogTrigger() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* @return The channel of the source.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetChannel() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
void InitSendable(SendableBuilder& builder) override;
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Create an object that represents one of the four outputs from an analog
|
||||
* trigger.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Because this class derives from DigitalSource, it can be passed into
|
||||
* routing functions for Counter, Encoder, etc.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param trigger A pointer to the trigger for which this is an output.
|
||||
* @param outputType An enum that specifies the output on the trigger to
|
||||
* represent.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
AnalogTriggerOutput(const AnalogTrigger& trigger,
|
||||
AnalogTriggerType outputType);
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -22,12 +22,36 @@ class BuiltInAccelerometer : public ErrorBase,
|
||||
public SendableBase,
|
||||
public Accelerometer {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Constructor.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param range The range the accelerometer will measure
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit BuiltInAccelerometer(Range range = kRange_8G);
|
||||
|
||||
// Accelerometer interface
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the measuring range of the accelerometer.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param range The maximum acceleration, positive or negative, that the
|
||||
* accelerometer will measure. Not all accelerometers support all
|
||||
* ranges.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetRange(Range range) override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* @return The acceleration of the roboRIO along the X axis in g-forces
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetX() override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* @return The acceleration of the roboRIO along the Y axis in g-forces
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetY() override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* @return The acceleration of the roboRIO along the Z axis in g-forces
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetZ() override;
|
||||
|
||||
void InitSendable(SendableBuilder& builder) override;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -25,10 +25,44 @@ namespace frc {
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class Button : public Trigger {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Specifies the command to run when a button is first pressed.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param command The pointer to the command to run
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void WhenPressed(Command* command);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Specifies the command to be scheduled while the button is pressed.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The command will be scheduled repeatedly while the button is pressed and
|
||||
* will be canceled when the button is released.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param command The pointer to the command to run
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void WhileHeld(Command* command);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Specifies the command to run when the button is released.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The command will be scheduled a single time.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param command The pointer to the command to run
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void WhenReleased(Command* command);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Cancels the specificed command when the button is pressed.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param command The command to be canceled
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void CancelWhenPressed(Command* command);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Toggle the specified command when the button is pressed.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param command The command to be toggled
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void ToggleWhenPressed(Command* command);
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -33,17 +33,92 @@ struct CANData {
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class CAN : public ErrorBase {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Create a new CAN communication interface with the specific device ID.
|
||||
* The device ID is 6 bits (0-63)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit CAN(int deviceId);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Closes the CAN communication.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
~CAN() override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Write a packet to the CAN device with a specific ID. This ID is 10 bits.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param data The data to write (8 bytes max)
|
||||
* @param length The data length to write
|
||||
* @param apiId The API ID to write.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void WritePacket(const uint8_t* data, int length, int apiId);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Write a repeating packet to the CAN device with a specific ID. This ID is
|
||||
* 10 bits. The RoboRIO will automatically repeat the packet at the specified
|
||||
* interval
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param data The data to write (8 bytes max)
|
||||
* @param length The data length to write
|
||||
* @param apiId The API ID to write.
|
||||
* @param repeatMs The period to repeat the packet at.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void WritePacketRepeating(const uint8_t* data, int length, int apiId,
|
||||
int repeatMs);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Stop a repeating packet with a specific ID. This ID is 10 bits.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param apiId The API ID to stop repeating
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void StopPacketRepeating(int apiId);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Read a new CAN packet. This will only return properly once per packet
|
||||
* received. Multiple calls without receiving another packet will return
|
||||
* false.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param apiId The API ID to read.
|
||||
* @param data Storage for the received data.
|
||||
* @return True if the data is valid, otherwise false.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool ReadPacketNew(int apiId, CANData* data);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Read a CAN packet. The will continuously return the last packet received,
|
||||
* without accounting for packet age.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param apiId The API ID to read.
|
||||
* @param data Storage for the received data.
|
||||
* @return True if the data is valid, otherwise false.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool ReadPacketLatest(int apiId, CANData* data);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Read a CAN packet. The will return the last packet received until the
|
||||
* packet is older then the requested timeout. Then it will return false.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param apiId The API ID to read.
|
||||
* @param timeoutMs The timeout time for the packet
|
||||
* @param data Storage for the received data.
|
||||
* @return True if the data is valid, otherwise false.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool ReadPacketTimeout(int apiId, int timeoutMs, CANData* data);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Read a CAN packet. The will return the last packet received until the
|
||||
* packet is older then the requested timeout. Then it will return false. The
|
||||
* period parameter is used when you know the packet is sent at specific
|
||||
* intervals, so calls will not attempt to read a new packet from the network
|
||||
* until that period has passed. We do not recommend users use this API unless
|
||||
* they know the implications.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param apiId The API ID to read.
|
||||
* @param timeoutMs The timeout time for the packet
|
||||
* @param periodMs The usual period for the packet
|
||||
* @param data Storage for the received data.
|
||||
* @return True if the data is valid, otherwise false.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool ReadPeriodicPacket(int apiId, int timeoutMs, int periodMs,
|
||||
CANData* data);
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -50,39 +50,251 @@ class Command : public ErrorBase, public SendableBase {
|
||||
friend class Scheduler;
|
||||
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Creates a new command.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The name of this command will be default.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
Command();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Creates a new command with the given name and no timeout.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param name the name for this command
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit Command(const wpi::Twine& name);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Creates a new command with the given timeout and a default name.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param timeout the time (in seconds) before this command "times out"
|
||||
* @see IsTimedOut()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit Command(double timeout);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Creates a new command with the given name and timeout.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param name the name of the command
|
||||
* @param timeout the time (in seconds) before this command "times out"
|
||||
* @see IsTimedOut()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
Command(const wpi::Twine& name, double timeout);
|
||||
|
||||
~Command() override = default;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns the time since this command was initialized (in seconds).
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This function will work even if there is no specified timeout.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return the time since this command was initialized (in seconds).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double TimeSinceInitialized() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* This method specifies that the given Subsystem is used by this command.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This method is crucial to the functioning of the Command System in general.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Note that the recommended way to call this method is in the constructor.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param subsystem The Subsystem required
|
||||
* @see Subsystem
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Requires(Subsystem* s);
|
||||
bool IsCanceled() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Starts up the command. Gets the command ready to start.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Note that the command will eventually start, however it will not
|
||||
* necessarily do so immediately, and may in fact be canceled before
|
||||
* initialize is even called.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Start();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* The run method is used internally to actually run the commands.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Whether or not the command should stay within the Scheduler.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Run();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* This will cancel the current command.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This will cancel the current command eventually. It can be called multiple
|
||||
* times. And it can be called when the command is not running. If the command
|
||||
* is running though, then the command will be marked as canceled and
|
||||
* eventually removed.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* A command can not be canceled if it is a part of a command group, you must
|
||||
* cancel the command group instead.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Cancel();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns whether or not the command is running.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This may return true even if the command has just been canceled, as it may
|
||||
* not have yet called Interrupted().
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return whether or not the command is running
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsRunning() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns whether or not the command has been initialized.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return whether or not the command has been initialized.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsInitialized() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns whether or not the command has completed running.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return whether or not the command has completed running.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsCompleted() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns whether or not this has been canceled.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return whether or not this has been canceled
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsCanceled() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns whether or not this command can be interrupted.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return whether or not this command can be interrupted
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsInterruptible() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Sets whether or not this command can be interrupted.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param interruptible whether or not this command can be interrupted
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetInterruptible(bool interruptible);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Checks if the command requires the given Subsystem.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param system the system
|
||||
* @return whether or not the subsystem is required (false if given nullptr)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool DoesRequire(Subsystem* subsystem) const;
|
||||
|
||||
typedef std::set<Subsystem*> SubsystemSet;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns the requirements (as an std::set of Subsystem pointers) of this
|
||||
* command.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The requirements (as an std::set of Subsystem pointers) of this
|
||||
* command
|
||||
*/
|
||||
SubsystemSet GetRequirements() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns the CommandGroup that this command is a part of.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Will return null if this Command is not in a group.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The CommandGroup that this command is a part of (or null if not in
|
||||
* group)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
CommandGroup* GetGroup() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Sets whether or not this Command should run when the robot is disabled.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* By default a command will not run when the robot is disabled, and will in
|
||||
* fact be canceled.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param run Whether this command should run when the robot is disabled.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetRunWhenDisabled(bool run);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns whether or not this Command will run when the robot is disabled, or
|
||||
* if it will cancel itself.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Whether this Command will run when the robot is disabled, or if it
|
||||
* will cancel itself.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool WillRunWhenDisabled() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the ID (sequence number) for this command.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The ID is a unique sequence number that is incremented for each command.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The ID of this command
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetID() const;
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Sets the timeout of this command.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param timeout the timeout (in seconds)
|
||||
* @see IsTimedOut()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetTimeout(double timeout);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns whether or not the TimeSinceInitialized() method returns a number
|
||||
* which is greater than or equal to the timeout for the command.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* If there is no timeout, this will always return false.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return whether the time has expired
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsTimedOut() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* If changes are locked, then this will generate a CommandIllegalUse error.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param message The message to report on error (it is appended by a default
|
||||
* message)
|
||||
* @return True if assert passed, false if assert failed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool AssertUnlocked(const std::string& message);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Sets the parent of this command. No actual change is made to the group.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param parent the parent
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetParent(CommandGroup* parent);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns whether the command has a parent.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param True if the command has a parent.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsParented() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Clears list of subsystem requirements.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This is only used by ConditionalCommand so cancelling the chosen command
|
||||
* works properly in CommandGroup.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void ClearRequirements();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* The initialize method is called the first time this Command is run after
|
||||
* being started.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void Initialize();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* The execute method is called repeatedly until this Command either finishes
|
||||
* or is canceled.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void Execute();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@@ -103,21 +315,72 @@ class Command : public ErrorBase, public SendableBase {
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual bool IsFinished() = 0;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Called when the command ended peacefully.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This is where you may want to wrap up loose ends, like shutting off a motor
|
||||
* that was being used in the command.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void End();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Called when the command ends because somebody called Cancel() or another
|
||||
* command shared the same requirements as this one, and booted it out.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This is where you may want to wrap up loose ends, like shutting off a motor
|
||||
* that was being used in the command.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Generally, it is useful to simply call the End() method within this method,
|
||||
* as done here.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void Interrupted();
|
||||
|
||||
virtual void _Initialize();
|
||||
virtual void _Interrupted();
|
||||
virtual void _Execute();
|
||||
virtual void _End();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* This works like Cancel(), except that it doesn't throw an exception if it
|
||||
* is a part of a command group.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Should only be called by the parent command group.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void _Cancel();
|
||||
|
||||
friend class ConditionalCommand;
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Prevents further changes from being made.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void LockChanges();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Called when the command has been removed.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This will call Interrupted() or End().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Removed();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* This is used internally to mark that the command has been started.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The lifecycle of a command is:
|
||||
*
|
||||
* StartRunning() is called. Run() is called (multiple times potentially).
|
||||
* Removed() is called.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* It is very important that StartRunning() and Removed() be called in order
|
||||
* or some assumptions of the code will be broken.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void StartRunning();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Called to indicate that the timer should start.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This is called right before Initialize() is, inside the Run() method.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void StartTiming();
|
||||
|
||||
// The time since this command was initialized
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -37,26 +37,130 @@ namespace frc {
|
||||
class CommandGroup : public Command {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
CommandGroup() = default;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Creates a new CommandGroup with the given name.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param name The name for this command group
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit CommandGroup(const wpi::Twine& name);
|
||||
|
||||
virtual ~CommandGroup() = default;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Adds a new Command to the group. The Command will be started after all the
|
||||
* previously added Commands.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Note that any requirements the given Command has will be added to the
|
||||
* group. For this reason, a Command's requirements can not be changed after
|
||||
* being added to a group.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* It is recommended that this method be called in the constructor.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param command The Command to be added
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void AddSequential(Command* command);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Adds a new Command to the group with a given timeout. The Command will be
|
||||
* started after all the previously added commands.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Once the Command is started, it will be run until it finishes or the time
|
||||
* expires, whichever is sooner. Note that the given Command will have no
|
||||
* knowledge that it is on a timer.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Note that any requirements the given Command has will be added to the
|
||||
* group. For this reason, a Command's requirements can not be changed after
|
||||
* being added to a group.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* It is recommended that this method be called in the constructor.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param command The Command to be added
|
||||
* @param timeout The timeout (in seconds)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void AddSequential(Command* command, double timeout);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Adds a new child Command to the group. The Command will be started after
|
||||
* all the previously added Commands.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Instead of waiting for the child to finish, a CommandGroup will have it run
|
||||
* at the same time as the subsequent Commands. The child will run until
|
||||
* either it finishes, a new child with conflicting requirements is started,
|
||||
* or the main sequence runs a Command with conflicting requirements. In the
|
||||
* latter two cases, the child will be canceled even if it says it can't be
|
||||
* interrupted.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Note that any requirements the given Command has will be added to the
|
||||
* group. For this reason, a Command's requirements can not be changed after
|
||||
* being added to a group.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* It is recommended that this method be called in the constructor.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param command The command to be added
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void AddParallel(Command* command);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Adds a new child Command to the group with the given timeout. The Command
|
||||
* will be started after all the previously added Commands.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Once the Command is started, it will run until it finishes, is interrupted,
|
||||
* or the time expires, whichever is sooner. Note that the given Command will
|
||||
* have no knowledge that it is on a timer.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Instead of waiting for the child to finish, a CommandGroup will have it run
|
||||
* at the same time as the subsequent Commands. The child will run until
|
||||
* either it finishes, the timeout expires, a new child with conflicting
|
||||
* requirements is started, or the main sequence runs a Command with
|
||||
* conflicting requirements. In the latter two cases, the child will be
|
||||
* canceled even if it says it can't be interrupted.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Note that any requirements the given Command has will be added to the
|
||||
* group. For this reason, a Command's requirements can not be changed after
|
||||
* being added to a group.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* It is recommended that this method be called in the constructor.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param command The command to be added
|
||||
* @param timeout The timeout (in seconds)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void AddParallel(Command* command, double timeout);
|
||||
|
||||
bool IsInterruptible() const;
|
||||
|
||||
int GetSize() const;
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Can be overridden by teams.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void Initialize();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Can be overridden by teams.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void Execute();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Can be overridden by teams.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual bool IsFinished();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Can be overridden by teams.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void End();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Can be overridden by teams.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void Interrupted();
|
||||
|
||||
virtual void _Initialize();
|
||||
virtual void _Interrupted();
|
||||
virtual void _Execute();
|
||||
virtual void _End();
|
||||
virtual void _Interrupted();
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
void CancelConflicts(Command* command);
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -34,9 +34,24 @@ namespace frc {
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class ConditionalCommand : public Command {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Creates a new ConditionalCommand with given onTrue and onFalse Commands.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param onTrue The Command to execute if Condition() returns true
|
||||
* @param onFalse The Command to execute if Condition() returns false
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit ConditionalCommand(Command* onTrue, Command* onFalse = nullptr);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Creates a new ConditionalCommand with given onTrue and onFalse Commands.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param name The name for this command group
|
||||
* @param onTrue The Command to execute if Condition() returns true
|
||||
* @param onFalse The Command to execute if Condition() returns false
|
||||
*/
|
||||
ConditionalCommand(const wpi::Twine& name, Command* onTrue,
|
||||
Command* onFalse = nullptr);
|
||||
|
||||
virtual ~ConditionalCommand() = default;
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -20,7 +20,13 @@ namespace frc {
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class InstantCommand : public Command {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Creates a new InstantCommand with the given name.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param name The name for this command
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit InstantCommand(const wpi::Twine& name);
|
||||
|
||||
InstantCommand() = default;
|
||||
virtual ~InstantCommand() = default;
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -29,36 +29,197 @@ namespace frc {
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class PIDSubsystem : public Subsystem, public PIDOutput, public PIDSource {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Instantiates a PIDSubsystem that will use the given P, I, and D values.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param name the name
|
||||
* @param p the proportional value
|
||||
* @param i the integral value
|
||||
* @param d the derivative value
|
||||
*/
|
||||
PIDSubsystem(const wpi::Twine& name, double p, double i, double d);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Instantiates a PIDSubsystem that will use the given P, I, and D values.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param name the name
|
||||
* @param p the proportional value
|
||||
* @param i the integral value
|
||||
* @param d the derivative value
|
||||
* @param f the feedforward value
|
||||
*/
|
||||
PIDSubsystem(const wpi::Twine& name, double p, double i, double d, double f);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Instantiates a PIDSubsystem that will use the given P, I, and D values.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* It will also space the time between PID loop calculations to be equal to
|
||||
* the given period.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param name the name
|
||||
* @param p the proportional value
|
||||
* @param i the integral value
|
||||
* @param d the derivative value
|
||||
* @param f the feedfoward value
|
||||
* @param period the time (in seconds) between calculations
|
||||
*/
|
||||
PIDSubsystem(const wpi::Twine& name, double p, double i, double d, double f,
|
||||
double period);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Instantiates a PIDSubsystem that will use the given P, I, and D values.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* It will use the class name as its name.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param p the proportional value
|
||||
* @param i the integral value
|
||||
* @param d the derivative value
|
||||
*/
|
||||
PIDSubsystem(double p, double i, double d);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Instantiates a PIDSubsystem that will use the given P, I, and D values.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* It will use the class name as its name.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param p the proportional value
|
||||
* @param i the integral value
|
||||
* @param d the derivative value
|
||||
* @param f the feedforward value
|
||||
*/
|
||||
PIDSubsystem(double p, double i, double d, double f);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Instantiates a PIDSubsystem that will use the given P, I, and D values.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* It will use the class name as its name. It will also space the time
|
||||
* between PID loop calculations to be equal to the given period.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param p the proportional value
|
||||
* @param i the integral value
|
||||
* @param d the derivative value
|
||||
* @param f the feedforward value
|
||||
* @param period the time (in seconds) between calculations
|
||||
*/
|
||||
PIDSubsystem(double p, double i, double d, double f, double period);
|
||||
|
||||
~PIDSubsystem() override = default;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Enables the internal PIDController.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Enable();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Disables the internal PIDController.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Disable();
|
||||
|
||||
// PIDOutput interface
|
||||
void PIDWrite(double output) override;
|
||||
|
||||
// PIDSource interface
|
||||
|
||||
double PIDGet() override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Sets the setpoint to the given value.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* If SetRange() was called, then the given setpoint will be trimmed to fit
|
||||
* within the range.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param setpoint the new setpoint
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetSetpoint(double setpoint);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Adds the given value to the setpoint.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* If SetRange() was used, then the bounds will still be honored by this
|
||||
* method.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param deltaSetpoint the change in the setpoint
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetSetpointRelative(double deltaSetpoint);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Sets the maximum and minimum values expected from the input.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param minimumInput the minimum value expected from the input
|
||||
* @param maximumInput the maximum value expected from the output
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetInputRange(double minimumInput, double maximumInput);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Sets the maximum and minimum values to write.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param minimumOutput the minimum value to write to the output
|
||||
* @param maximumOutput the maximum value to write to the output
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetOutputRange(double minimumOutput, double maximumOutput);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Return the current setpoint.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The current setpoint
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetSetpoint();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns the current position.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return the current position
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetPosition();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns the current rate.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return the current rate
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetRate();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the absolute error which is considered tolerable for use with
|
||||
* OnTarget.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param absValue absolute error which is tolerable
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void SetAbsoluteTolerance(double absValue);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the percentage error which is considered tolerable for use with
|
||||
* OnTarget().
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param percent percentage error which is tolerable
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void SetPercentTolerance(double percent);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Return true if the error is within the percentage of the total input range,
|
||||
* determined by SetTolerance().
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This asssumes that the maximum and minimum input were set using SetInput().
|
||||
* Use OnTarget() in the IsFinished() method of commands that use this
|
||||
* subsystem.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Currently this just reports on target as the actual value passes through
|
||||
* the setpoint. Ideally it should be based on being within the tolerance for
|
||||
* some period of time.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return True if the error is within the percentage tolerance of the input
|
||||
* range
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual bool OnTarget() const;
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns the PIDController used by this PIDSubsystem.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Use this if you would like to fine tune the PID loop.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The PIDController used by this PIDSubsystem
|
||||
*/
|
||||
std::shared_ptr<PIDController> GetPIDController();
|
||||
|
||||
virtual double ReturnPIDInput() = 0;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -26,15 +26,65 @@ class Subsystem;
|
||||
|
||||
class Scheduler : public ErrorBase, public SendableBase {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns the Scheduler, creating it if one does not exist.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return the Scheduler
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static Scheduler* GetInstance();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Add a command to be scheduled later.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* In any pass through the scheduler, all commands are added to the additions
|
||||
* list, then at the end of the pass, they are all scheduled.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param command The command to be scheduled
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void AddCommand(Command* command);
|
||||
|
||||
void AddButton(ButtonScheduler* button);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Registers a Subsystem to this Scheduler, so that the Scheduler might know
|
||||
* if a default Command needs to be run.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* All Subsystems should call this.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param system the system
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void RegisterSubsystem(Subsystem* subsystem);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Runs a single iteration of the loop.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This method should be called often in order to have a functioning
|
||||
* Command system. The loop has five stages:
|
||||
*
|
||||
* <ol>
|
||||
* <li>Poll the Buttons</li>
|
||||
* <li>Execute/Remove the Commands</li>
|
||||
* <li>Send values to SmartDashboard</li>
|
||||
* <li>Add Commands</li>
|
||||
* <li>Add Defaults</li>
|
||||
* </ol>
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Run();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Removes the Command from the Scheduler.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param command the command to remove
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Remove(Command* command);
|
||||
|
||||
void RemoveAll();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Completely resets the scheduler. Undefined behavior if running.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void ResetAll();
|
||||
|
||||
void SetEnabled(bool enabled);
|
||||
|
||||
void InitSendable(SendableBuilder& builder) override;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -24,25 +24,133 @@ class Subsystem : public ErrorBase, public SendableBase {
|
||||
friend class Scheduler;
|
||||
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Creates a subsystem with the given name.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param name the name of the subsystem
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit Subsystem(const wpi::Twine& name);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Sets the default command. If this is not called or is called with null,
|
||||
* then there will be no default command for the subsystem.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* <b>WARNING:</b> This should <b>NOT</b> be called in a constructor if the
|
||||
* subsystem is a singleton.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param command the default command (or null if there should be none)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetDefaultCommand(Command* command);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns the default command (or null if there is none).
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return the default command
|
||||
*/
|
||||
Command* GetDefaultCommand();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns the default command name, or empty string is there is none.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return the default command name
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wpi::StringRef GetDefaultCommandName();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Sets the current command.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param command the new current command
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetCurrentCommand(Command* command);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns the command which currently claims this subsystem.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return the command which currently claims this subsystem
|
||||
*/
|
||||
Command* GetCurrentCommand() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns the current command name, or empty string if no current command.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return the current command name
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wpi::StringRef GetCurrentCommandName() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* When the run method of the scheduler is called this method will be called.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void Periodic();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Initialize the default command for this subsystem.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This is meant to be the place to call SetDefaultCommand in a subsystem and
|
||||
* will be called on all the subsystems by the CommandBase method before the
|
||||
* program starts running by using the list of all registered Subsystems
|
||||
* inside the Scheduler.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This should be overridden by a Subsystem that has a default Command
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void InitDefaultCommand();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Associate a Sendable with this Subsystem.
|
||||
* Also update the child's name.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param name name to give child
|
||||
* @param child sendable
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void AddChild(const wpi::Twine& name, std::shared_ptr<Sendable> child);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Associate a Sendable with this Subsystem.
|
||||
* Also update the child's name.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param name name to give child
|
||||
* @param child sendable
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void AddChild(const wpi::Twine& name, Sendable* child);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Associate a Sendable with this Subsystem.
|
||||
* Also update the child's name.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param name name to give child
|
||||
* @param child sendable
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void AddChild(const wpi::Twine& name, Sendable& child);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Associate a {@link Sendable} with this Subsystem.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param child sendable
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void AddChild(std::shared_ptr<Sendable> child);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Associate a {@link Sendable} with this Subsystem.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param child sendable
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void AddChild(Sendable* child);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Associate a {@link Sendable} with this Subsystem.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param child sendable
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void AddChild(Sendable& child);
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Call this to alert Subsystem that the current command is actually the
|
||||
* command.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Sometimes, the Subsystem is told that it has no command while the Scheduler
|
||||
* is going through the loop, only to be soon after given a new one. This will
|
||||
* avoid that situation.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void ConfirmCommand();
|
||||
|
||||
Command* m_currentCommand = nullptr;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -20,11 +20,27 @@ namespace frc {
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class TimedCommand : public Command {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Creates a new TimedCommand with the given name and timeout.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param name the name of the command
|
||||
* @param timeout the time (in seconds) before this command "times out"
|
||||
*/
|
||||
TimedCommand(const wpi::Twine& name, double timeout);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Creates a new WaitCommand with the given timeout.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param timeout the time (in seconds) before this command "times out"
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit TimedCommand(double timeout);
|
||||
|
||||
virtual ~TimedCommand() = default;
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Ends command when timed out.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsFinished() override;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -15,8 +15,21 @@ namespace frc {
|
||||
|
||||
class WaitCommand : public TimedCommand {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Creates a new WaitCommand with the given name and timeout.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param name the name of the command
|
||||
* @param timeout the time (in seconds) before this command "times out"
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit WaitCommand(double timeout);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Creates a new WaitCommand with the given timeout.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param timeout the time (in seconds) before this command "times out"
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WaitCommand(const wpi::Twine& name, double timeout);
|
||||
|
||||
virtual ~WaitCommand() = default;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -15,11 +15,24 @@ namespace frc {
|
||||
|
||||
class WaitUntilCommand : public Command {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* A WaitCommand will wait until a certain match time before finishing.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This will wait until the game clock reaches some value, then continue to
|
||||
* the next command.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @see CommandGroup
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit WaitUntilCommand(double time);
|
||||
|
||||
WaitUntilCommand(const wpi::Twine& name, double time);
|
||||
|
||||
virtual ~WaitUntilCommand() = default;
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Check if we've reached the actual finish time.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual bool IsFinished();
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -32,27 +32,135 @@ namespace frc {
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class Compressor : public ErrorBase, public SendableBase {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
// Default PCM ID is 0
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Constructor. The default PCM ID is 0.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param module The PCM ID to use (0-62)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit Compressor(int pcmID = SensorUtil::GetDefaultSolenoidModule());
|
||||
|
||||
~Compressor() override = default;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Starts closed-loop control. Note that closed loop control is enabled by
|
||||
* default.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Start();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Stops closed-loop control. Note that closed loop control is enabled by
|
||||
* default.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Stop();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Check if compressor output is active.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return true if the compressor is on
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Enabled() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Check if the pressure switch is triggered.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return true if pressure is low
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetPressureSwitchValue() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Query how much current the compressor is drawing.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The current through the compressor, in amps
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetCompressorCurrent() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Enables or disables automatically turning the compressor on when the
|
||||
* pressure is low.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param on Set to true to enable closed loop control of the compressor.
|
||||
* False to disable.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetClosedLoopControl(bool on);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns true if the compressor will automatically turn on when the
|
||||
* pressure is low.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return True if closed loop control of the compressor is enabled. False if
|
||||
* disabled.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetClosedLoopControl() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Query if the compressor output has been disabled due to high current draw.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return true if PCM is in fault state : Compressor Drive is
|
||||
* disabled due to compressor current being too high.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetCompressorCurrentTooHighFault() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Query if the compressor output has been disabled due to high current draw
|
||||
* (sticky).
|
||||
*
|
||||
* A sticky fault will not clear on device reboot, it must be cleared through
|
||||
* code or the webdash.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return true if PCM sticky fault is set : Compressor Drive is
|
||||
* disabled due to compressor current being too high.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetCompressorCurrentTooHighStickyFault() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Query if the compressor output has been disabled due to a short circuit
|
||||
* (sticky).
|
||||
*
|
||||
* A sticky fault will not clear on device reboot, it must be cleared through
|
||||
* code or the webdash.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return true if PCM sticky fault is set : Compressor output
|
||||
* appears to be shorted.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetCompressorShortedStickyFault() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Query if the compressor output has been disabled due to a short circuit.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return true if PCM is in fault state : Compressor output
|
||||
* appears to be shorted.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetCompressorShortedFault() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Query if the compressor output does not appear to be wired (sticky).
|
||||
*
|
||||
* A sticky fault will not clear on device reboot, it must be cleared through
|
||||
* code or the webdash.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return true if PCM sticky fault is set : Compressor does not
|
||||
* appear to be wired, i.e. compressor is not drawing enough current.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetCompressorNotConnectedStickyFault() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Query if the compressor output does not appear to be wired.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return true if PCM is in fault state : Compressor does not
|
||||
* appear to be wired, i.e. compressor is not drawing enough current.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetCompressorNotConnectedFault() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Clear ALL sticky faults inside PCM that Compressor is wired to.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* If a sticky fault is set, then it will be persistently cleared. Compressor
|
||||
* drive maybe momentarily disable while flags are being cleared. Care should
|
||||
* be taken to not call this too frequently, otherwise normal compressor
|
||||
* functionality may be prevented.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* If no sticky faults are set then this call will have no effect.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void ClearAllPCMStickyFaults();
|
||||
|
||||
void InitSendable(SendableBuilder& builder) override;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -13,32 +13,138 @@ namespace frc {
|
||||
|
||||
class ControllerPower {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the input voltage to the robot controller.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The controller input voltage value in Volts
|
||||
* @deprecated Use RobotController static class method
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("Use RobotController static class method")
|
||||
static double GetInputVoltage();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the input current to the robot controller.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The controller input current value in Amps
|
||||
* @deprecated Use RobotController static class method
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("Use RobotController static class method")
|
||||
static double GetInputCurrent();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the voltage of the 3.3V rail.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The controller 3.3V rail voltage value in Volts
|
||||
* @deprecated Use RobotController static class method
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("Use RobotController static class method")
|
||||
static double GetVoltage3V3();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the current output of the 3.3V rail.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The controller 3.3V rail output current value in Amps
|
||||
* @deprecated Use RobotController static class method
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("Use RobotController static class method")
|
||||
static double GetCurrent3V3();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the enabled state of the 3.3V rail. The rail may be disabled due to a
|
||||
* controller brownout, a short circuit on the rail, or controller
|
||||
* over-voltage.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The controller 3.3V rail enabled value. True for enabled.
|
||||
* @deprecated Use RobotController static class method
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("Use RobotController static class method")
|
||||
static bool GetEnabled3V3();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the count of the total current faults on the 3.3V rail since the
|
||||
* controller has booted.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The number of faults
|
||||
* @deprecated Use RobotController static class method
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("Use RobotController static class method")
|
||||
static int GetFaultCount3V3();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the voltage of the 5V rail.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The controller 5V rail voltage value in Volts
|
||||
* @deprecated Use RobotController static class method
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("Use RobotController static class method")
|
||||
static double GetVoltage5V();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the current output of the 5V rail.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The controller 5V rail output current value in Amps
|
||||
* @deprecated Use RobotController static class method
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("Use RobotController static class method")
|
||||
static double GetCurrent5V();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the enabled state of the 5V rail. The rail may be disabled due to a
|
||||
* controller brownout, a short circuit on the rail, or controller
|
||||
* over-voltage.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The controller 5V rail enabled value. True for enabled.
|
||||
* @deprecated Use RobotController static class method
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("Use RobotController static class method")
|
||||
static bool GetEnabled5V();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the count of the total current faults on the 5V rail since the
|
||||
* controller has booted.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The number of faults
|
||||
* @deprecated Use RobotController static class method
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("Use RobotController static class method")
|
||||
static int GetFaultCount5V();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the voltage of the 6V rail.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The controller 6V rail voltage value in Volts
|
||||
* @deprecated Use RobotController static class method
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("Use RobotController static class method")
|
||||
static double GetVoltage6V();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the current output of the 6V rail.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The controller 6V rail output current value in Amps
|
||||
* @deprecated Use RobotController static class method
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("Use RobotController static class method")
|
||||
static double GetCurrent6V();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the enabled state of the 6V rail. The rail may be disabled due to a
|
||||
* controller brownout, a short circuit on the rail, or controller
|
||||
* over-voltage.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The controller 6V rail enabled value. True for enabled.
|
||||
* @deprecated Use RobotController static class method
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("Use RobotController static class method")
|
||||
static bool GetEnabled6V();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the count of the total current faults on the 6V rail since the
|
||||
* controller has booted.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The number of faults.
|
||||
* @deprecated Use RobotController static class method
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("Use RobotController static class method")
|
||||
static int GetFaultCount6V();
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -40,57 +40,378 @@ class Counter : public ErrorBase, public SendableBase, public CounterBase {
|
||||
kExternalDirection = 3
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Create an instance of a counter where no sources are selected.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* They all must be selected by calling functions to specify the upsource and
|
||||
* the downsource independently.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This creates a ChipObject counter and initializes status variables
|
||||
* appropriately.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The counter will start counting immediately.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param mode The counter mode
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit Counter(Mode mode = kTwoPulse);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Create an instance of a Counter object.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Create an up-Counter instance given a channel.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The counter will start counting immediately.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param channel The DIO channel to use as the up source. 0-9 are on-board,
|
||||
* 10-25 are on the MXP
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit Counter(int channel);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Create an instance of a counter from a Digital Source (such as a Digital
|
||||
* Input).
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This is used if an existing digital input is to be shared by multiple other
|
||||
* objects such as encoders or if the Digital Source is not a Digital Input
|
||||
* channel (such as an Analog Trigger).
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The counter will start counting immediately.
|
||||
* @param source A pointer to the existing DigitalSource object. It will be
|
||||
* set as the Up Source.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit Counter(DigitalSource* source);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Create an instance of a counter from a Digital Source (such as a Digital
|
||||
* Input).
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This is used if an existing digital input is to be shared by multiple other
|
||||
* objects such as encoders or if the Digital Source is not a Digital Input
|
||||
* channel (such as an Analog Trigger).
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The counter will start counting immediately.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param source A pointer to the existing DigitalSource object. It will be
|
||||
* set as the Up Source.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit Counter(std::shared_ptr<DigitalSource> source);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Create an instance of a Counter object.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Create an instance of a simple up-Counter given an analog trigger.
|
||||
* Use the trigger state output from the analog trigger.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The counter will start counting immediately.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param trigger The reference to the existing AnalogTrigger object.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit Counter(const AnalogTrigger& trigger);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Create an instance of a Counter object.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Creates a full up-down counter given two Digital Sources.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param encodingType The quadrature decoding mode (1x or 2x)
|
||||
* @param upSource The pointer to the DigitalSource to set as the up
|
||||
* source
|
||||
* @param downSource The pointer to the DigitalSource to set as the down
|
||||
* source
|
||||
* @param inverted True to invert the output (reverse the direction)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
Counter(EncodingType encodingType, DigitalSource* upSource,
|
||||
DigitalSource* downSource, bool inverted);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Create an instance of a Counter object.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Creates a full up-down counter given two Digital Sources.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param encodingType The quadrature decoding mode (1x or 2x)
|
||||
* @param upSource The pointer to the DigitalSource to set as the up
|
||||
* source
|
||||
* @param downSource The pointer to the DigitalSource to set as the down
|
||||
* source
|
||||
* @param inverted True to invert the output (reverse the direction)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
Counter(EncodingType encodingType, std::shared_ptr<DigitalSource> upSource,
|
||||
std::shared_ptr<DigitalSource> downSource, bool inverted);
|
||||
|
||||
~Counter() override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the upsource for the counter as a digital input channel.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param channel The DIO channel to use as the up source. 0-9 are on-board,
|
||||
* 10-25 are on the MXP
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetUpSource(int channel);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the up counting source to be an analog trigger.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param analogTrigger The analog trigger object that is used for the Up
|
||||
* Source
|
||||
* @param triggerType The analog trigger output that will trigger the
|
||||
* counter.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetUpSource(AnalogTrigger* analogTrigger, AnalogTriggerType triggerType);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the up counting source to be an analog trigger.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param analogTrigger The analog trigger object that is used for the Up
|
||||
* Source
|
||||
* @param triggerType The analog trigger output that will trigger the
|
||||
* counter.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetUpSource(std::shared_ptr<AnalogTrigger> analogTrigger,
|
||||
AnalogTriggerType triggerType);
|
||||
|
||||
void SetUpSource(DigitalSource* source);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the source object that causes the counter to count up.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Set the up counting DigitalSource.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param source Pointer to the DigitalSource object to set as the up source
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetUpSource(std::shared_ptr<DigitalSource> source);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the source object that causes the counter to count up.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Set the up counting DigitalSource.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param source Reference to the DigitalSource object to set as the up source
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetUpSource(DigitalSource& source);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the edge sensitivity on an up counting source.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Set the up source to either detect rising edges or falling edges or both.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param risingEdge True to trigger on rising edges
|
||||
* @param fallingEdge True to trigger on falling edges
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetUpSourceEdge(bool risingEdge, bool fallingEdge);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Disable the up counting source to the counter.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void ClearUpSource();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the down counting source to be a digital input channel.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param channel The DIO channel to use as the up source. 0-9 are on-board,
|
||||
* 10-25 are on the MXP
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetDownSource(int channel);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the down counting source to be an analog trigger.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param analogTrigger The analog trigger object that is used for the Down
|
||||
* Source
|
||||
* @param triggerType The analog trigger output that will trigger the
|
||||
* counter.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetDownSource(AnalogTrigger* analogTrigger,
|
||||
AnalogTriggerType triggerType);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the down counting source to be an analog trigger.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param analogTrigger The analog trigger object that is used for the Down
|
||||
* Source
|
||||
* @param triggerType The analog trigger output that will trigger the
|
||||
* counter.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetDownSource(std::shared_ptr<AnalogTrigger> analogTrigger,
|
||||
AnalogTriggerType triggerType);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the source object that causes the counter to count down.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Set the down counting DigitalSource.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param source Pointer to the DigitalSource object to set as the down source
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetDownSource(DigitalSource* source);
|
||||
void SetDownSource(std::shared_ptr<DigitalSource> source);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the source object that causes the counter to count down.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Set the down counting DigitalSource.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param source Reference to the DigitalSource object to set as the down
|
||||
* source
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetDownSource(DigitalSource& source);
|
||||
|
||||
void SetDownSource(std::shared_ptr<DigitalSource> source);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the edge sensitivity on a down counting source.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Set the down source to either detect rising edges or falling edges.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param risingEdge True to trigger on rising edges
|
||||
* @param fallingEdge True to trigger on falling edges
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetDownSourceEdge(bool risingEdge, bool fallingEdge);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Disable the down counting source to the counter.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void ClearDownSource();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set standard up / down counting mode on this counter.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Up and down counts are sourced independently from two inputs.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetUpDownCounterMode();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set external direction mode on this counter.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Counts are sourced on the Up counter input.
|
||||
* The Down counter input represents the direction to count.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetExternalDirectionMode();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set Semi-period mode on this counter.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Counts up on both rising and falling edges.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetSemiPeriodMode(bool highSemiPeriod);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Configure the counter to count in up or down based on the length of the
|
||||
* input pulse.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This mode is most useful for direction sensitive gear tooth sensors.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param threshold The pulse length beyond which the counter counts the
|
||||
* opposite direction. Units are seconds.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetPulseLengthMode(double threshold);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the Counter to return reversed sensing on the direction.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This allows counters to change the direction they are counting in the case
|
||||
* of 1X and 2X quadrature encoding only. Any other counter mode isn't
|
||||
* supported.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param reverseDirection true if the value counted should be negated.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetReverseDirection(bool reverseDirection);
|
||||
|
||||
// CounterBase interface
|
||||
int Get() const override;
|
||||
void Reset() override;
|
||||
double GetPeriod() const override;
|
||||
void SetMaxPeriod(double maxPeriod) override;
|
||||
void SetUpdateWhenEmpty(bool enabled);
|
||||
bool GetStopped() const override;
|
||||
bool GetDirection() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the Samples to Average which specifies the number of samples of the
|
||||
* timer to average when calculating the period. Perform averaging to account
|
||||
* for mechanical imperfections or as oversampling to increase resolution.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param samplesToAverage The number of samples to average from 1 to 127.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetSamplesToAverage(int samplesToAverage);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the Samples to Average which specifies the number of samples of the
|
||||
* timer to average when calculating the period.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Perform averaging to account for mechanical imperfections or as
|
||||
* oversampling to increase resolution.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The number of samples being averaged (from 1 to 127)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetSamplesToAverage() const;
|
||||
int GetFPGAIndex() const { return m_index; }
|
||||
|
||||
int GetFPGAIndex() const;
|
||||
|
||||
// CounterBase interface
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Read the current counter value.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Read the value at this instant. It may still be running, so it reflects the
|
||||
* current value. Next time it is read, it might have a different value.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int Get() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Reset the Counter to zero.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Set the counter value to zero. This doesn't effect the running state of the
|
||||
* counter, just sets the current value to zero.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Reset() override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the Period of the most recent count.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Returns the time interval of the most recent count. This can be used for
|
||||
* velocity calculations to determine shaft speed.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @returns The period between the last two pulses in units of seconds.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetPeriod() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the maximum period where the device is still considered "moving".
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Sets the maximum period where the device is considered moving. This value
|
||||
* is used to determine the "stopped" state of the counter using the
|
||||
* GetStopped method.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param maxPeriod The maximum period where the counted device is considered
|
||||
* moving in seconds.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetMaxPeriod(double maxPeriod) override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Select whether you want to continue updating the event timer output when
|
||||
* there are no samples captured.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The output of the event timer has a buffer of periods that are averaged and
|
||||
* posted to a register on the FPGA. When the timer detects that the event
|
||||
* source has stopped (based on the MaxPeriod) the buffer of samples to be
|
||||
* averaged is emptied. If you enable the update when empty, you will be
|
||||
* notified of the stopped source and the event time will report 0 samples.
|
||||
* If you disable update when empty, the most recent average will remain on
|
||||
* the output until a new sample is acquired. You will never see 0 samples
|
||||
* output (except when there have been no events since an FPGA reset) and you
|
||||
* will likely not see the stopped bit become true (since it is updated at the
|
||||
* end of an average and there are no samples to average).
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param enabled True to enable update when empty
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetUpdateWhenEmpty(bool enabled);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Determine if the clock is stopped.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Determine if the clocked input is stopped based on the MaxPeriod value set
|
||||
* using the SetMaxPeriod method. If the clock exceeds the MaxPeriod, then the
|
||||
* device (and counter) are assumed to be stopped and it returns true.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Returns true if the most recent counter period exceeds the
|
||||
* MaxPeriod value set by SetMaxPeriod.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetStopped() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* The last direction the counter value changed.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The last direction the counter value changed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetDirection() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
void InitSendable(SendableBuilder& builder) override;
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -16,6 +16,12 @@ namespace frc {
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class DMC60 : public PWMSpeedController {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Constructor for a Digilent DMC 60.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param channel The PWM channel that the DMC 60 is attached to. 0-9 are
|
||||
* on-board, 10-19 are on the MXP port
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit DMC60(int channel);
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -34,18 +34,83 @@ class DigitalGlitchFilter : public ErrorBase, public SendableBase {
|
||||
DigitalGlitchFilter();
|
||||
~DigitalGlitchFilter() override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Assigns the DigitalSource to this glitch filter.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param input The DigitalSource to add.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Add(DigitalSource* input);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Assigns the Encoder to this glitch filter.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param input The Encoder to add.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Add(Encoder* input);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Assigns the Counter to this glitch filter.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param input The Counter to add.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Add(Counter* input);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Removes a digital input from this filter.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Removes the DigitalSource from this glitch filter and re-assigns it to
|
||||
* the default filter.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param input The DigitalSource to remove.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Remove(DigitalSource* input);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Removes an encoder from this filter.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Removes the Encoder from this glitch filter and re-assigns it to
|
||||
* the default filter.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param input The Encoder to remove.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Remove(Encoder* input);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Removes a counter from this filter.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Removes the Counter from this glitch filter and re-assigns it to
|
||||
* the default filter.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param input The Counter to remove.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Remove(Counter* input);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Sets the number of cycles that the input must not change state for.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param fpgaCycles The number of FPGA cycles.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetPeriodCycles(int fpgaCycles);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Sets the number of nanoseconds that the input must not change state for.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param nanoseconds The number of nanoseconds.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetPeriodNanoSeconds(uint64_t nanoseconds);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Gets the number of cycles that the input must not change state for.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The number of cycles.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetPeriodCycles();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Gets the number of nanoseconds that the input must not change state for.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The number of nanoseconds.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
uint64_t GetPeriodNanoSeconds();
|
||||
|
||||
void InitSendable(SendableBuilder& builder) override;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -24,16 +24,45 @@ class DigitalGlitchFilter;
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class DigitalInput : public DigitalSource {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Create an instance of a Digital Input class.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Creates a digital input given a channel.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param channel The DIO channel 0-9 are on-board, 10-25 are on the MXP port
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit DigitalInput(int channel);
|
||||
|
||||
~DigitalInput() override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the value from a digital input channel.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Retrieve the value of a single digital input channel from the FPGA.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Get() const;
|
||||
int GetChannel() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
// Digital Source Interface
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* @return The HAL Handle to the specified source.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
HAL_Handle GetPortHandleForRouting() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* @return The type of analog trigger output to be used. 0 for Digitals
|
||||
*/
|
||||
AnalogTriggerType GetAnalogTriggerTypeForRouting() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Is source an AnalogTrigger
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsAnalogTrigger() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* @return The GPIO channel number that this object represents.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetChannel() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
void InitSendable(SendableBuilder& builder) override;
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -23,16 +23,98 @@ namespace frc {
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class DigitalOutput : public ErrorBase, public SendableBase {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Create an instance of a digital output.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Create a digital output given a channel.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param channel The digital channel 0-9 are on-board, 10-25 are on the MXP
|
||||
* port
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit DigitalOutput(int channel);
|
||||
|
||||
~DigitalOutput() override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the value of a digital output.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Set the value of a digital output to either one (true) or zero (false).
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param value 1 (true) for high, 0 (false) for disabled
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Set(bool value);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Gets the value being output from the Digital Output.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return the state of the digital output.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Get() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* @return The GPIO channel number that this object represents.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetChannel() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Output a single pulse on the digital output line.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Send a single pulse on the digital output line where the pulse duration is
|
||||
* specified in seconds. Maximum pulse length is 0.0016 seconds.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param length The pulse length in seconds
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Pulse(double length);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Determine if the pulse is still going.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Determine if a previously started pulse is still going.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsPulsing() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Change the PWM frequency of the PWM output on a Digital Output line.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The valid range is from 0.6 Hz to 19 kHz. The frequency resolution is
|
||||
* logarithmic.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* There is only one PWM frequency for all digital channels.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param rate The frequency to output all digital output PWM signals.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetPWMRate(double rate);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Enable a PWM Output on this line.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Allocate one of the 6 DO PWM generator resources from this module.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Supply the initial duty-cycle to output so as to avoid a glitch when first
|
||||
* starting.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The resolution of the duty cycle is 8-bit for low frequencies (1kHz or
|
||||
* less) but is reduced the higher the frequency of the PWM signal is.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param initialDutyCycle The duty-cycle to start generating. [0..1]
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void EnablePWM(double initialDutyCycle);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Change this line from a PWM output back to a static Digital Output line.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Free up one of the 6 DO PWM generator resources that were in use.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void DisablePWM();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Change the duty-cycle that is being generated on the line.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The resolution of the duty cycle is 8-bit for low frequencies (1kHz or
|
||||
* less) but is reduced the higher the frequency of the PWM signal is.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param dutyCycle The duty-cycle to change to. [0..1]
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void UpdateDutyCycle(double dutyCycle);
|
||||
|
||||
void InitSendable(SendableBuilder& builder) override;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -24,12 +24,61 @@ class DoubleSolenoid : public SolenoidBase {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
enum Value { kOff, kForward, kReverse };
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Constructor.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Uses the default PCM ID of 0.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param forwardChannel The forward channel number on the PCM (0..7).
|
||||
* @param reverseChannel The reverse channel number on the PCM (0..7).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit DoubleSolenoid(int forwardChannel, int reverseChannel);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Constructor.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param moduleNumber The CAN ID of the PCM.
|
||||
* @param forwardChannel The forward channel on the PCM to control (0..7).
|
||||
* @param reverseChannel The reverse channel on the PCM to control (0..7).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
DoubleSolenoid(int moduleNumber, int forwardChannel, int reverseChannel);
|
||||
|
||||
~DoubleSolenoid() override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the value of a solenoid.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param value The value to set (Off, Forward or Reverse)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void Set(Value value);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Read the current value of the solenoid.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The current value of the solenoid.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual Value Get() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Check if the forward solenoid is blacklisted.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* If a solenoid is shorted, it is added to the blacklist and disabled until
|
||||
* power cycle, or until faults are cleared.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @see ClearAllPCMStickyFaults()
|
||||
* @return If solenoid is disabled due to short.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsFwdSolenoidBlackListed() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Check if the reverse solenoid is blacklisted.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* If a solenoid is shorted, it is added to the blacklist and disabled until
|
||||
* power cycle, or until faults are cleared.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @see ClearAllPCMStickyFaults()
|
||||
* @return If solenoid is disabled due to short.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsRevSolenoidBlackListed() const;
|
||||
|
||||
void InitSendable(SendableBuilder& builder) override;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -101,21 +101,106 @@ class DifferentialDrive : public RobotDriveBase {
|
||||
static constexpr double kDefaultQuickStopThreshold = 0.2;
|
||||
static constexpr double kDefaultQuickStopAlpha = 0.1;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Construct a DifferentialDrive.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* To pass multiple motors per side, use a SpeedControllerGroup. If a motor
|
||||
* needs to be inverted, do so before passing it in.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
DifferentialDrive(SpeedController& leftMotor, SpeedController& rightMotor);
|
||||
|
||||
~DifferentialDrive() override = default;
|
||||
|
||||
DifferentialDrive(const DifferentialDrive&) = delete;
|
||||
DifferentialDrive& operator=(const DifferentialDrive&) = delete;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Arcade drive method for differential drive platform.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Note: Some drivers may prefer inverted rotation controls. This can be done
|
||||
* by negating the value passed for rotation.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param xSpeed The speed at which the robot should drive along the X
|
||||
* axis [-1.0..1.0]. Forward is negative.
|
||||
* @param zRotation The rotation rate of the robot around the Z axis
|
||||
* [-1.0..1.0]. Clockwise is positive.
|
||||
* @param squaredInputs If set, decreases the input sensitivity at low speeds.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void ArcadeDrive(double xSpeed, double zRotation, bool squaredInputs = true);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Curvature drive method for differential drive platform.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The rotation argument controls the curvature of the robot's path rather
|
||||
* than its rate of heading change. This makes the robot more controllable at
|
||||
* high speeds. Also handles the robot's quick turn functionality - "quick
|
||||
* turn" overrides constant-curvature turning for turn-in-place maneuvers.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param xSpeed The robot's speed along the X axis [-1.0..1.0]. Forward
|
||||
* is positive.
|
||||
* @param zRotation The robot's rotation rate around the Z axis [-1.0..1.0].
|
||||
* Clockwise is positive.
|
||||
* @param isQuickTurn If set, overrides constant-curvature turning for
|
||||
* turn-in-place maneuvers.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void CurvatureDrive(double xSpeed, double zRotation, bool isQuickTurn);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Tank drive method for differential drive platform.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param leftSpeed The robot left side's speed along the X axis
|
||||
* [-1.0..1.0]. Forward is positive.
|
||||
* @param rightSpeed The robot right side's speed along the X axis
|
||||
* [-1.0..1.0]. Forward is positive.
|
||||
* @param squaredInputs If set, decreases the input sensitivity at low speeds.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void TankDrive(double leftSpeed, double rightSpeed,
|
||||
bool squaredInputs = true);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Sets the QuickStop speed threshold in curvature drive.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* QuickStop compensates for the robot's moment of inertia when stopping after
|
||||
* a QuickTurn.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* While QuickTurn is enabled, the QuickStop accumulator takes on the rotation
|
||||
* rate value outputted by the low-pass filter when the robot's speed along
|
||||
* the X axis is below the threshold. When QuickTurn is disabled, the
|
||||
* accumulator's value is applied against the computed angular power request
|
||||
* to slow the robot's rotation.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param threshold X speed below which quick stop accumulator will receive
|
||||
* rotation rate values [0..1.0].
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetQuickStopThreshold(double threshold);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Sets the low-pass filter gain for QuickStop in curvature drive.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The low-pass filter filters incoming rotation rate commands to smooth out
|
||||
* high frequency changes.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param alpha Low-pass filter gain [0.0..2.0]. Smaller values result in
|
||||
* slower output changes. Values between 1.0 and 2.0 result in
|
||||
* output oscillation. Values below 0.0 and above 2.0 are
|
||||
* unstable.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetQuickStopAlpha(double alpha);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Gets if the power sent to the right side of the drivetrain is multipled by
|
||||
* -1.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return true if the right side is inverted
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsRightSideInverted() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Sets if the power sent to the right side of the drivetrain should be
|
||||
* multipled by -1.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param rightSideInverted true if right side power should be multipled by -1
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetRightSideInverted(bool rightSideInverted);
|
||||
|
||||
void StopMotor() override;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -50,18 +50,76 @@ class KilloughDrive : public RobotDriveBase {
|
||||
static constexpr double kDefaultRightMotorAngle = 120.0;
|
||||
static constexpr double kDefaultBackMotorAngle = 270.0;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Construct a Killough drive with the given motors and default motor angles.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The default motor angles make the wheels on each corner parallel to their
|
||||
* respective opposite sides.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* If a motor needs to be inverted, do so before passing it in.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param leftMotor The motor on the left corner.
|
||||
* @param rightMotor The motor on the right corner.
|
||||
* @param backMotor The motor on the back corner.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
KilloughDrive(SpeedController& leftMotor, SpeedController& rightMotor,
|
||||
SpeedController& backMotor);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Construct a Killough drive with the given motors.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Angles are measured in degrees clockwise from the positive X axis.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param leftMotor The motor on the left corner.
|
||||
* @param rightMotor The motor on the right corner.
|
||||
* @param backMotor The motor on the back corner.
|
||||
* @param leftMotorAngle The angle of the left wheel's forward direction of
|
||||
* travel.
|
||||
* @param rightMotorAngle The angle of the right wheel's forward direction of
|
||||
* travel.
|
||||
* @param backMotorAngle The angle of the back wheel's forward direction of
|
||||
* travel.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
KilloughDrive(SpeedController& leftMotor, SpeedController& rightMotor,
|
||||
SpeedController& backMotor, double leftMotorAngle,
|
||||
double rightMotorAngle, double backMotorAngle);
|
||||
|
||||
~KilloughDrive() override = default;
|
||||
|
||||
KilloughDrive(const KilloughDrive&) = delete;
|
||||
KilloughDrive& operator=(const KilloughDrive&) = delete;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Drive method for Killough platform.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Angles are measured clockwise from the positive X axis. The robot's speed
|
||||
* is independent from its angle or rotation rate.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param ySpeed The robot's speed along the Y axis [-1.0..1.0]. Right is
|
||||
* positive.
|
||||
* @param xSpeed The robot's speed along the X axis [-1.0..1.0]. Forward is
|
||||
* positive.
|
||||
* @param zRotation The robot's rotation rate around the Z axis [-1.0..1.0].
|
||||
* Clockwise is positive.
|
||||
* @param gyroAngle The current angle reading from the gyro in degrees around
|
||||
* the Z axis. Use this to implement field-oriented controls.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void DriveCartesian(double ySpeed, double xSpeed, double zRotation,
|
||||
double gyroAngle = 0.0);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Drive method for Killough platform.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Angles are measured clockwise from the positive X axis. The robot's speed
|
||||
* is independent from its angle or rotation rate.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param magnitude The robot's speed at a given angle [-1.0..1.0]. Forward is
|
||||
* positive.
|
||||
* @param angle The angle around the Z axis at which the robot drives in
|
||||
* degrees [-180..180].
|
||||
* @param zRotation The robot's rotation rate around the Z axis [-1.0..1.0].
|
||||
* Clockwise is positive.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void DrivePolar(double magnitude, double angle, double zRotation);
|
||||
|
||||
void StopMotor() override;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -64,19 +64,67 @@ class SpeedController;
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class MecanumDrive : public RobotDriveBase {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Construct a MecanumDrive.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* If a motor needs to be inverted, do so before passing it in.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
MecanumDrive(SpeedController& frontLeftMotor, SpeedController& rearLeftMotor,
|
||||
SpeedController& frontRightMotor,
|
||||
SpeedController& rearRightMotor);
|
||||
|
||||
~MecanumDrive() override = default;
|
||||
|
||||
MecanumDrive(const MecanumDrive&) = delete;
|
||||
MecanumDrive& operator=(const MecanumDrive&) = delete;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Drive method for Mecanum platform.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Angles are measured clockwise from the positive X axis. The robot's speed
|
||||
* is independent from its angle or rotation rate.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param ySpeed The robot's speed along the Y axis [-1.0..1.0]. Right is
|
||||
* positive.
|
||||
* @param xSpeed The robot's speed along the X axis [-1.0..1.0]. Forward is
|
||||
* positive.
|
||||
* @param zRotation The robot's rotation rate around the Z axis [-1.0..1.0].
|
||||
* Clockwise is positive.
|
||||
* @param gyroAngle The current angle reading from the gyro in degrees around
|
||||
* the Z axis. Use this to implement field-oriented controls.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void DriveCartesian(double ySpeed, double xSpeed, double zRotation,
|
||||
double gyroAngle = 0.0);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Drive method for Mecanum platform.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Angles are measured clockwise from the positive X axis. The robot's speed
|
||||
* is independent from its angle or rotation rate.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param magnitude The robot's speed at a given angle [-1.0..1.0]. Forward is
|
||||
* positive.
|
||||
* @param angle The angle around the Z axis at which the robot drives in
|
||||
* degrees [-180..180].
|
||||
* @param zRotation The robot's rotation rate around the Z axis [-1.0..1.0].
|
||||
* Clockwise is positive.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void DrivePolar(double magnitude, double angle, double zRotation);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Gets if the power sent to the right side of the drivetrain is multipled by
|
||||
* -1.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return true if the right side is inverted
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsRightSideInverted() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Sets if the power sent to the right side of the drivetrain should be
|
||||
* multipled by -1.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param rightSideInverted true if right side power should be multipled by -1
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetRightSideInverted(bool rightSideInverted);
|
||||
|
||||
void StopMotor() override;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -44,9 +44,32 @@ class RobotDriveBase : public MotorSafety, public SendableBase {
|
||||
RobotDriveBase(const RobotDriveBase&) = delete;
|
||||
RobotDriveBase& operator=(const RobotDriveBase&) = delete;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Sets the deadband applied to the drive inputs (e.g., joystick values).
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The default value is 0.02. Inputs smaller than the deadband are set to 0.0
|
||||
* while inputs larger than the deadband are scaled from 0.0 to 1.0. See
|
||||
* ApplyDeadband().
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param deadband The deadband to set.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetDeadband(double deadband);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Configure the scaling factor for using RobotDrive with motor controllers in
|
||||
* a mode other than PercentVbus or to limit the maximum output.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param maxOutput Multiplied with the output percentage computed by the
|
||||
* drive functions.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetMaxOutput(double maxOutput);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Feed the motor safety object. Resets the timer that will stop the motors if
|
||||
* it completes.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @see MotorSafetyHelper::Feed()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void FeedWatchdog();
|
||||
|
||||
void SetExpiration(double timeout) override;
|
||||
@@ -58,8 +81,24 @@ class RobotDriveBase : public MotorSafety, public SendableBase {
|
||||
void GetDescription(wpi::raw_ostream& desc) const override = 0;
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Limit motor values to the -1.0 to +1.0 range.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double Limit(double number);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns 0.0 if the given value is within the specified range around zero.
|
||||
* The remaining range between the deadband and 1.0 is scaled from 0.0 to 1.0.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param value value to clip
|
||||
* @param deadband range around zero
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double ApplyDeadband(double number, double deadband);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Normalize all wheel speeds if the magnitude of any wheel is greater than
|
||||
* 1.0.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Normalize(wpi::MutableArrayRef<double> wheelSpeeds);
|
||||
|
||||
double m_deadband = 0.02;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -16,9 +16,30 @@ struct Vector2d {
|
||||
Vector2d() = default;
|
||||
Vector2d(double x, double y);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Rotate a vector in Cartesian space.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param angle angle in degrees by which to rotate vector counter-clockwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Rotate(double angle);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns dot product of this vector with argument.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param vec Vector with which to perform dot product.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double Dot(const Vector2d& vec) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns magnitude of vector.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double Magnitude() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns scalar projection of this vector onto argument.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param vec Vector onto which to project this vector.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double ScalarProject(const Vector2d& vec) const;
|
||||
|
||||
double x = 0.0;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -37,41 +37,229 @@ class DriverStation : public ErrorBase, public RobotStateInterface {
|
||||
enum MatchType { kNone, kPractice, kQualification, kElimination };
|
||||
|
||||
~DriverStation() override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Return a reference to the singleton DriverStation.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Reference to the DS instance
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static DriverStation& GetInstance();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Report an error to the DriverStation messages window.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The error is also printed to the program console.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void ReportError(const wpi::Twine& error);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Report a warning to the DriverStation messages window.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The warning is also printed to the program console.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void ReportWarning(const wpi::Twine& error);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Report an error to the DriverStation messages window.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The error is also printed to the program console.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void ReportError(bool isError, int code, const wpi::Twine& error,
|
||||
const wpi::Twine& location, const wpi::Twine& stack);
|
||||
|
||||
static constexpr int kJoystickPorts = 6;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* The state of one joystick button. Button indexes begin at 1.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param stick The joystick to read.
|
||||
* @param button The button index, beginning at 1.
|
||||
* @return The state of the joystick button.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetStickButton(int stick, int button);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Whether one joystick button was pressed since the last check. Button
|
||||
* indexes begin at 1.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param stick The joystick to read.
|
||||
* @param button The button index, beginning at 1.
|
||||
* @return Whether the joystick button was pressed since the last check.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetStickButtonPressed(int stick, int button);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Whether one joystick button was released since the last check. Button
|
||||
* indexes begin at 1.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param stick The joystick to read.
|
||||
* @param button The button index, beginning at 1.
|
||||
* @return Whether the joystick button was released since the last check.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetStickButtonReleased(int stick, int button);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the value of the axis on a joystick.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This depends on the mapping of the joystick connected to the specified
|
||||
* port.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param stick The joystick to read.
|
||||
* @param axis The analog axis value to read from the joystick.
|
||||
* @return The value of the axis on the joystick.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetStickAxis(int stick, int axis);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the state of a POV on the joystick.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return the angle of the POV in degrees, or -1 if the POV is not pressed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetStickPOV(int stick, int pov);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* The state of the buttons on the joystick.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param stick The joystick to read.
|
||||
* @return The state of the buttons on the joystick.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetStickButtons(int stick) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns the number of axes on a given joystick port.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param stick The joystick port number
|
||||
* @return The number of axes on the indicated joystick
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetStickAxisCount(int stick) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns the number of POVs on a given joystick port.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param stick The joystick port number
|
||||
* @return The number of POVs on the indicated joystick
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetStickPOVCount(int stick) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns the number of buttons on a given joystick port.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param stick The joystick port number
|
||||
* @return The number of buttons on the indicated joystick
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetStickButtonCount(int stick) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns a boolean indicating if the controller is an xbox controller.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param stick The joystick port number
|
||||
* @return A boolean that is true if the controller is an xbox controller.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetJoystickIsXbox(int stick) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns the type of joystick at a given port.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param stick The joystick port number
|
||||
* @return The HID type of joystick at the given port
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetJoystickType(int stick) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns the name of the joystick at the given port.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param stick The joystick port number
|
||||
* @return The name of the joystick at the given port
|
||||
*/
|
||||
std::string GetJoystickName(int stick) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns the types of Axes on a given joystick port.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param stick The joystick port number and the target axis
|
||||
* @return What type of axis the axis is reporting to be
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetJoystickAxisType(int stick, int axis) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Check if the DS has enabled the robot.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return True if the robot is enabled and the DS is connected
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsEnabled() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Check if the robot is disabled.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return True if the robot is explicitly disabled or the DS is not connected
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsDisabled() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Check if the DS is commanding autonomous mode.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return True if the robot is being commanded to be in autonomous mode
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsAutonomous() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Check if the DS is commanding teleop mode.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return True if the robot is being commanded to be in teleop mode
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsOperatorControl() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Check if the DS is commanding test mode.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return True if the robot is being commanded to be in test mode
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsTest() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Check if the DS is attached.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return True if the DS is connected to the robot
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsDSAttached() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Has a new control packet from the driver station arrived since the last
|
||||
* time this function was called?
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Warning: If you call this function from more than one place at the same
|
||||
* time, you will not get the intended behavior.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return True if the control data has been updated since the last call.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsNewControlData() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Is the driver station attached to a Field Management System?
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return True if the robot is competing on a field being controlled by a
|
||||
* Field Management System
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsFMSAttached() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Check if the FPGA outputs are enabled.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The outputs may be disabled if the robot is disabled or e-stopped, the
|
||||
* watchdog has expired, or if the roboRIO browns out.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return True if the FPGA outputs are enabled.
|
||||
* @deprecated Use RobotController static class method
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("Use RobotController static class method")
|
||||
bool IsSysActive() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Check if the system is browned out.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return True if the system is browned out
|
||||
* @deprecated Use RobotController static class method
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("Use RobotController static class method")
|
||||
bool IsBrownedOut() const;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -81,11 +269,75 @@ class DriverStation : public ErrorBase, public RobotStateInterface {
|
||||
int GetMatchNumber() const;
|
||||
int GetReplayNumber() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Return the alliance that the driver station says it is on.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This could return kRed or kBlue.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The Alliance enum (kRed, kBlue or kInvalid)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
Alliance GetAlliance() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Return the driver station location on the field.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This could return 1, 2, or 3.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The location of the driver station (1-3, 0 for invalid)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetLocation() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Wait until a new packet comes from the driver station.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This blocks on a semaphore, so the waiting is efficient.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This is a good way to delay processing until there is new driver station
|
||||
* data to act on.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void WaitForData();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Wait until a new packet comes from the driver station, or wait for a
|
||||
* timeout.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* If the timeout is less then or equal to 0, wait indefinitely.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Timeout is in milliseconds
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This blocks on a semaphore, so the waiting is efficient.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This is a good way to delay processing until there is new driver station
|
||||
* data to act on.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param timeout Timeout time in seconds
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return true if new data, otherwise false
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool WaitForData(double timeout);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Return the approximate match time.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The FMS does not send an official match time to the robots, but does send
|
||||
* an approximate match time. The value will count down the time remaining in
|
||||
* the current period (auto or teleop).
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Warning: This is not an official time (so it cannot be used to dispute ref
|
||||
* calls or guarantee that a function will trigger before the match ends).
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The Practice Match function of the DS approximates the behaviour seen on
|
||||
* the field.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Time remaining in current match period (auto or teleop)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetMatchTime() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Read the battery voltage.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The battery voltage in Volts.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetBatteryVoltage() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@@ -124,15 +376,49 @@ class DriverStation : public ErrorBase, public RobotStateInterface {
|
||||
void InTest(bool entering) { m_userInTest = entering; }
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Copy data from the DS task for the user.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* If no new data exists, it will just be returned, otherwise
|
||||
* the data will be copied from the DS polling loop.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetData();
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* DriverStation constructor.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This is only called once the first time GetInstance() is called
|
||||
*/
|
||||
DriverStation();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Reports errors related to unplugged joysticks.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Throttles the errors so that they don't overwhelm the DS.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void ReportJoystickUnpluggedError(const wpi::Twine& message);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Reports errors related to unplugged joysticks.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Throttles the errors so that they don't overwhelm the DS.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void ReportJoystickUnpluggedWarning(const wpi::Twine& message);
|
||||
|
||||
void Run();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Gets ControlWord data from the cache. If 50ms has passed, or the force
|
||||
* parameter is set, the cached data is updated. Otherwise the data is just
|
||||
* copied from the cache.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param force True to force an update to the cache, otherwise update if 50ms
|
||||
* have passed.
|
||||
* @param controlWord Structure to put the return control word data into.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void UpdateControlWord(bool force, HAL_ControlWord& controlWord) const;
|
||||
|
||||
void SendMatchData();
|
||||
|
||||
// Joystick User Data
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -49,48 +49,311 @@ class Encoder : public ErrorBase,
|
||||
kResetOnRisingEdge
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Encoder constructor.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Construct a Encoder given a and b channels.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The counter will start counting immediately.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param aChannel The a channel DIO channel. 0-9 are on-board, 10-25
|
||||
* are on the MXP port
|
||||
* @param bChannel The b channel DIO channel. 0-9 are on-board, 10-25
|
||||
* are on the MXP port
|
||||
* @param reverseDirection represents the orientation of the encoder and
|
||||
* inverts the output values if necessary so forward
|
||||
* represents positive values.
|
||||
* @param encodingType either k1X, k2X, or k4X to indicate 1X, 2X or 4X
|
||||
* decoding. If 4X is selected, then an encoder FPGA
|
||||
* object is used and the returned counts will be 4x
|
||||
* the encoder spec'd value since all rising and
|
||||
* falling edges are counted. If 1X or 2X are selected
|
||||
* then a counter object will be used and the returned
|
||||
* value will either exactly match the spec'd count or
|
||||
* be double (2x) the spec'd count.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
Encoder(int aChannel, int bChannel, bool reverseDirection = false,
|
||||
EncodingType encodingType = k4X);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Encoder constructor.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Construct a Encoder given a and b channels as digital inputs. This is used
|
||||
* in the case where the digital inputs are shared. The Encoder class will not
|
||||
* allocate the digital inputs and assume that they already are counted.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The counter will start counting immediately.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param aSource The source that should be used for the a channel.
|
||||
* @param bSource the source that should be used for the b channel.
|
||||
* @param reverseDirection represents the orientation of the encoder and
|
||||
* inverts the output values if necessary so forward
|
||||
* represents positive values.
|
||||
* @param encodingType either k1X, k2X, or k4X to indicate 1X, 2X or 4X
|
||||
* decoding. If 4X is selected, then an encoder FPGA
|
||||
* object is used and the returned counts will be 4x
|
||||
* the encoder spec'd value since all rising and
|
||||
* falling edges are counted. If 1X or 2X are selected
|
||||
* then a counter object will be used and the returned
|
||||
* value will either exactly match the spec'd count or
|
||||
* be double (2x) the spec'd count.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
Encoder(DigitalSource* aSource, DigitalSource* bSource,
|
||||
bool reverseDirection = false, EncodingType encodingType = k4X);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Encoder constructor.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Construct a Encoder given a and b channels as digital inputs. This is used
|
||||
* in the case where the digital inputs are shared. The Encoder class will not
|
||||
* allocate the digital inputs and assume that they already are counted.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The counter will start counting immediately.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param aSource The source that should be used for the a channel.
|
||||
* @param bSource the source that should be used for the b channel.
|
||||
* @param reverseDirection represents the orientation of the encoder and
|
||||
* inverts the output values if necessary so forward
|
||||
* represents positive values.
|
||||
* @param encodingType either k1X, k2X, or k4X to indicate 1X, 2X or 4X
|
||||
* decoding. If 4X is selected, then an encoder FPGA
|
||||
* object is used and the returned counts will be 4x
|
||||
* the encoder spec'd value since all rising and
|
||||
* falling edges are counted. If 1X or 2X are selected
|
||||
* then a counter object will be used and the returned
|
||||
* value will either exactly match the spec'd count or
|
||||
* be double (2x) the spec'd count.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
Encoder(DigitalSource& aSource, DigitalSource& bSource,
|
||||
bool reverseDirection = false, EncodingType encodingType = k4X);
|
||||
|
||||
Encoder(std::shared_ptr<DigitalSource> aSource,
|
||||
std::shared_ptr<DigitalSource> bSource, bool reverseDirection = false,
|
||||
EncodingType encodingType = k4X);
|
||||
Encoder(DigitalSource* aSource, DigitalSource* bSource,
|
||||
bool reverseDirection = false, EncodingType encodingType = k4X);
|
||||
Encoder(DigitalSource& aSource, DigitalSource& bSource,
|
||||
bool reverseDirection = false, EncodingType encodingType = k4X);
|
||||
|
||||
~Encoder() override;
|
||||
|
||||
// CounterBase interface
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Gets the current count.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Returns the current count on the Encoder. This method compensates for the
|
||||
* decoding type.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Current count from the Encoder adjusted for the 1x, 2x, or 4x scale
|
||||
* factor.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int Get() const override;
|
||||
int GetRaw() const;
|
||||
int GetEncodingScale() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Reset the Encoder distance to zero.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Resets the current count to zero on the encoder.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Reset() override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns the period of the most recent pulse.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Returns the period of the most recent Encoder pulse in seconds. This method
|
||||
* compensates for the decoding type.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Warning: This returns unscaled periods. Use GetRate() for rates that are
|
||||
* scaled using the value from SetDistancePerPulse().
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Period in seconds of the most recent pulse.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetPeriod() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Sets the maximum period for stopped detection.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Sets the value that represents the maximum period of the Encoder before it
|
||||
* will assume that the attached device is stopped. This timeout allows users
|
||||
* to determine if the wheels or other shaft has stopped rotating.
|
||||
* This method compensates for the decoding type.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @deprecated Use SetMinRate() in favor of this method. This takes unscaled
|
||||
* periods and SetMinRate() scales using value from
|
||||
* SetDistancePerPulse().
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param maxPeriod The maximum time between rising and falling edges before
|
||||
* the FPGA will report the device stopped. This is expressed
|
||||
* in seconds.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetMaxPeriod(double maxPeriod) override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Determine if the encoder is stopped.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Using the MaxPeriod value, a boolean is returned that is true if the
|
||||
* encoder is considered stopped and false if it is still moving. A stopped
|
||||
* encoder is one where the most recent pulse width exceeds the MaxPeriod.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return True if the encoder is considered stopped.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetStopped() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* The last direction the encoder value changed.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The last direction the encoder value changed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetDirection() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Gets the raw value from the encoder.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The raw value is the actual count unscaled by the 1x, 2x, or 4x scale
|
||||
* factor.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Current raw count from the encoder
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetRaw() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* The encoding scale factor 1x, 2x, or 4x, per the requested encodingType.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Used to divide raw edge counts down to spec'd counts.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetEncodingScale() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the distance the robot has driven since the last reset.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The distance driven since the last reset as scaled by the value
|
||||
* from SetDistancePerPulse().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetDistance() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the current rate of the encoder.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Units are distance per second as scaled by the value from
|
||||
* SetDistancePerPulse().
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The current rate of the encoder.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetRate() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the minimum rate of the device before the hardware reports it stopped.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param minRate The minimum rate. The units are in distance per second as
|
||||
* scaled by the value from SetDistancePerPulse().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetMinRate(double minRate);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the distance per pulse for this encoder.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This sets the multiplier used to determine the distance driven based on the
|
||||
* count value from the encoder.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Do not include the decoding type in this scale. The library already
|
||||
* compensates for the decoding type.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Set this value based on the encoder's rated Pulses per Revolution and
|
||||
* factor in gearing reductions following the encoder shaft.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This distance can be in any units you like, linear or angular.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param distancePerPulse The scale factor that will be used to convert
|
||||
* pulses to useful units.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetDistancePerPulse(double distancePerPulse);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the distance per pulse for this encoder.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The scale factor that will be used to convert pulses to useful
|
||||
* units.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetDistancePerPulse() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the direction sensing for this encoder.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This sets the direction sensing on the encoder so that it could count in
|
||||
* the correct software direction regardless of the mounting.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param reverseDirection true if the encoder direction should be reversed
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetReverseDirection(bool reverseDirection);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the Samples to Average which specifies the number of samples of the
|
||||
* timer to average when calculating the period.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Perform averaging to account for mechanical imperfections or as
|
||||
* oversampling to increase resolution.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param samplesToAverage The number of samples to average from 1 to 127.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetSamplesToAverage(int samplesToAverage);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the Samples to Average which specifies the number of samples of the
|
||||
* timer to average when calculating the period.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Perform averaging to account for mechanical imperfections or as
|
||||
* oversampling to increase resolution.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The number of samples being averaged (from 1 to 127)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetSamplesToAverage() const;
|
||||
|
||||
double PIDGet() override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the index source for the encoder.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* When this source is activated, the encoder count automatically resets.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param channel A DIO channel to set as the encoder index
|
||||
* @param type The state that will cause the encoder to reset
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetIndexSource(int channel, IndexingType type = kResetOnRisingEdge);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the index source for the encoder.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* When this source is activated, the encoder count automatically resets.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param channel A digital source to set as the encoder index
|
||||
* @param type The state that will cause the encoder to reset
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetIndexSource(const DigitalSource& source,
|
||||
IndexingType type = kResetOnRisingEdge);
|
||||
|
||||
void InitSendable(SendableBuilder& builder) override;
|
||||
|
||||
int GetFPGAIndex() const;
|
||||
|
||||
void InitSendable(SendableBuilder& builder) override;
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Common initialization code for Encoders.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This code allocates resources for Encoders and is common to all
|
||||
* constructors. The counter will start counting immediately.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param reverseDirection If true, counts down instead of up (this is all
|
||||
* relative)
|
||||
* @param encodingType either k1X, k2X, or k4X to indicate 1X, 2X or 4X
|
||||
* decoding. If 4X is selected, then an encoder FPGA
|
||||
* object is used and the returned counts will be 4x
|
||||
* the encoder spec'd value since all rising and
|
||||
* falling edges are counted. If 1X or 2X are selected
|
||||
* then a counter object will be used and the returned
|
||||
* value will either exactly match the spec'd count or
|
||||
* be double (2x) the spec'd count.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void InitEncoder(bool reverseDirection, EncodingType encodingType);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* The scale needed to convert a raw counter value into a number of encoder
|
||||
* pulses.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double DecodingScaleFactor() const;
|
||||
|
||||
std::shared_ptr<DigitalSource> m_aSource; // The A phase of the quad encoder
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -80,36 +80,119 @@ class ErrorBase {
|
||||
ErrorBase(const ErrorBase&) = delete;
|
||||
ErrorBase& operator=(const ErrorBase&) = delete;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* @brief Retrieve the current error.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Get the current error information associated with this sensor.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual Error& GetError();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* @brief Retrieve the current error.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Get the current error information associated with this sensor.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual const Error& GetError() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* @brief Clear the current error information associated with this sensor.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void ClearError() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* @brief Set error information associated with a C library call that set an
|
||||
* error to the "errno" global variable.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param contextMessage A custom message from the code that set the error.
|
||||
* @param filename Filename of the error source
|
||||
* @param function Function of the error source
|
||||
* @param lineNumber Line number of the error source
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void SetErrnoError(const wpi::Twine& contextMessage,
|
||||
wpi::StringRef filename, wpi::StringRef function,
|
||||
int lineNumber) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* @brief Set the current error information associated from the nivision Imaq
|
||||
* API.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param success The return from the function
|
||||
* @param contextMessage A custom message from the code that set the error.
|
||||
* @param filename Filename of the error source
|
||||
* @param function Function of the error source
|
||||
* @param lineNumber Line number of the error source
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void SetImaqError(int success, const wpi::Twine& contextMessage,
|
||||
wpi::StringRef filename, wpi::StringRef function,
|
||||
int lineNumber) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* @brief Set the current error information associated with this sensor.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param code The error code
|
||||
* @param contextMessage A custom message from the code that set the error.
|
||||
* @param filename Filename of the error source
|
||||
* @param function Function of the error source
|
||||
* @param lineNumber Line number of the error source
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void SetError(Error::Code code, const wpi::Twine& contextMessage,
|
||||
wpi::StringRef filename, wpi::StringRef function,
|
||||
int lineNumber) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* @brief Set the current error information associated with this sensor.
|
||||
* Range versions use for initialization code.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param code The error code
|
||||
* @param minRange The minimum allowed allocation range
|
||||
* @param maxRange The maximum allowed allocation range
|
||||
* @param requestedValue The requested value to allocate
|
||||
* @param contextMessage A custom message from the code that set the error.
|
||||
* @param filename Filename of the error source
|
||||
* @param function Function of the error source
|
||||
* @param lineNumber Line number of the error source
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void SetErrorRange(Error::Code code, int32_t minRange,
|
||||
int32_t maxRange, int32_t requestedValue,
|
||||
const wpi::Twine& contextMessage,
|
||||
wpi::StringRef filename, wpi::StringRef function,
|
||||
int lineNumber) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* @brief Set the current error information associated with this sensor.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param errorMessage The error message from WPIErrors.h
|
||||
* @param contextMessage A custom message from the code that set the error.
|
||||
* @param filename Filename of the error source
|
||||
* @param function Function of the error source
|
||||
* @param lineNumber Line number of the error source
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void SetWPIError(const wpi::Twine& errorMessage, Error::Code code,
|
||||
const wpi::Twine& contextMessage,
|
||||
wpi::StringRef filename, wpi::StringRef function,
|
||||
int lineNumber) const;
|
||||
|
||||
virtual void CloneError(const ErrorBase& rhs) const;
|
||||
virtual void ClearError() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* @brief Check if the current error code represents a fatal error.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return true if the current error is fatal.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual bool StatusIsFatal() const;
|
||||
|
||||
static void SetGlobalError(Error::Code code, const wpi::Twine& contextMessage,
|
||||
wpi::StringRef filename, wpi::StringRef function,
|
||||
int lineNumber);
|
||||
|
||||
static void SetGlobalWPIError(const wpi::Twine& errorMessage,
|
||||
const wpi::Twine& contextMessage,
|
||||
wpi::StringRef filename,
|
||||
wpi::StringRef function, int lineNumber);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Retrieve the current global error.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static Error& GetGlobalError();
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -69,22 +69,106 @@ namespace frc {
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class LinearDigitalFilter : public Filter {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Create a linear FIR or IIR filter.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param source The PIDSource object that is used to get values
|
||||
* @param ffGains The "feed forward" or FIR gains
|
||||
* @param fbGains The "feed back" or IIR gains
|
||||
*/
|
||||
LinearDigitalFilter(PIDSource& source, wpi::ArrayRef<double> ffGains,
|
||||
wpi::ArrayRef<double> fbGains);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Create a linear FIR or IIR filter.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param source The PIDSource object that is used to get values
|
||||
* @param ffGains The "feed forward" or FIR gains
|
||||
* @param fbGains The "feed back" or IIR gains
|
||||
*/
|
||||
LinearDigitalFilter(std::shared_ptr<PIDSource> source,
|
||||
wpi::ArrayRef<double> ffGains,
|
||||
wpi::ArrayRef<double> fbGains);
|
||||
|
||||
// Static methods to create commonly used filters
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Creates a one-pole IIR low-pass filter of the form:<br>
|
||||
* y[n] = (1 - gain) * x[n] + gain * y[n-1]<br>
|
||||
* where gain = e<sup>-dt / T</sup>, T is the time constant in seconds
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This filter is stable for time constants greater than zero.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param source The PIDSource object that is used to get values
|
||||
* @param timeConstant The discrete-time time constant in seconds
|
||||
* @param period The period in seconds between samples taken by the user
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static LinearDigitalFilter SinglePoleIIR(PIDSource& source,
|
||||
double timeConstant, double period);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Creates a first-order high-pass filter of the form:<br>
|
||||
* y[n] = gain * x[n] + (-gain) * x[n-1] + gain * y[n-1]<br>
|
||||
* where gain = e<sup>-dt / T</sup>, T is the time constant in seconds
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This filter is stable for time constants greater than zero.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param source The PIDSource object that is used to get values
|
||||
* @param timeConstant The discrete-time time constant in seconds
|
||||
* @param period The period in seconds between samples taken by the user
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static LinearDigitalFilter HighPass(PIDSource& source, double timeConstant,
|
||||
double period);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Creates a K-tap FIR moving average filter of the form:<br>
|
||||
* y[n] = 1/k * (x[k] + x[k-1] + … + x[0])
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This filter is always stable.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param source The PIDSource object that is used to get values
|
||||
* @param taps The number of samples to average over. Higher = smoother but
|
||||
* slower
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static LinearDigitalFilter MovingAverage(PIDSource& source, int taps);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Creates a one-pole IIR low-pass filter of the form:<br>
|
||||
* y[n] = (1 - gain) * x[n] + gain * y[n-1]<br>
|
||||
* where gain = e<sup>-dt / T</sup>, T is the time constant in seconds
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This filter is stable for time constants greater than zero.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param source The PIDSource object that is used to get values
|
||||
* @param timeConstant The discrete-time time constant in seconds
|
||||
* @param period The period in seconds between samples taken by the user
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static LinearDigitalFilter SinglePoleIIR(std::shared_ptr<PIDSource> source,
|
||||
double timeConstant, double period);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Creates a first-order high-pass filter of the form:<br>
|
||||
* y[n] = gain * x[n] + (-gain) * x[n-1] + gain * y[n-1]<br>
|
||||
* where gain = e<sup>-dt / T</sup>, T is the time constant in seconds
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This filter is stable for time constants greater than zero.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param source The PIDSource object that is used to get values
|
||||
* @param timeConstant The discrete-time time constant in seconds
|
||||
* @param period The period in seconds between samples taken by the user
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static LinearDigitalFilter HighPass(std::shared_ptr<PIDSource> source,
|
||||
double timeConstant, double period);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Creates a K-tap FIR moving average filter of the form:<br>
|
||||
* y[n] = 1/k * (x[k] + x[k-1] + … + x[0])
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This filter is always stable.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param source The PIDSource object that is used to get values
|
||||
* @param taps The number of samples to average over. Higher = smoother but
|
||||
* slower
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static LinearDigitalFilter MovingAverage(std::shared_ptr<PIDSource> source,
|
||||
int taps);
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -93,6 +177,11 @@ class LinearDigitalFilter : public Filter {
|
||||
void Reset() override;
|
||||
|
||||
// PIDSource interface
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Calculates the next value of the filter
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The filtered value at this step
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double PIDGet() override;
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -26,11 +26,44 @@ class GearTooth : public Counter {
|
||||
// 55 uSec for threshold
|
||||
static constexpr double kGearToothThreshold = 55e-6;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Construct a GearTooth sensor given a channel.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param channel The DIO channel that the sensor is connected to.
|
||||
* 0-9 are on-board, 10-25 are on the MXP.
|
||||
* @param directionSensitive True to enable the pulse length decoding in
|
||||
* hardware to specify count direction.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit GearTooth(int channel, bool directionSensitive = false);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Construct a GearTooth sensor given a digital input.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This should be used when sharing digital inputs.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param source A pointer to the existing DigitalSource object
|
||||
* (such as a DigitalInput)
|
||||
* @param directionSensitive True to enable the pulse length decoding in
|
||||
* hardware to specify count direction.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit GearTooth(DigitalSource* source, bool directionSensitive = false);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Construct a GearTooth sensor given a digital input.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This should be used when sharing digital inputs.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param source A reference to the existing DigitalSource object
|
||||
* (such as a DigitalInput)
|
||||
* @param directionSensitive True to enable the pulse length decoding in
|
||||
* hardware to specify count direction.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit GearTooth(std::shared_ptr<DigitalSource> source,
|
||||
bool directionSensitive = false);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Common code called by the constructors.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void EnableDirectionSensing(bool directionSensitive);
|
||||
|
||||
void InitSendable(SendableBuilder& builder) override;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -52,25 +52,127 @@ class GenericHID : public ErrorBase {
|
||||
virtual double GetX(JoystickHand hand = kRightHand) const = 0;
|
||||
virtual double GetY(JoystickHand hand = kRightHand) const = 0;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the button value (starting at button 1).
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The buttons are returned in a single 16 bit value with one bit representing
|
||||
* the state of each button. The appropriate button is returned as a boolean
|
||||
* value.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param button The button number to be read (starting at 1)
|
||||
* @return The state of the button.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetRawButton(int button) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Whether the button was pressed since the last check. Button indexes begin
|
||||
* at 1.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param button The button index, beginning at 1.
|
||||
* @return Whether the button was pressed since the last check.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetRawButtonPressed(int button);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Whether the button was released since the last check. Button indexes begin
|
||||
* at 1.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param button The button index, beginning at 1.
|
||||
* @return Whether the button was released since the last check.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetRawButtonReleased(int button);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the value of the axis.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param axis The axis to read, starting at 0.
|
||||
* @return The value of the axis.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetRawAxis(int axis) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the angle in degrees of a POV on the HID.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The POV angles start at 0 in the up direction, and increase clockwise
|
||||
* (e.g. right is 90, upper-left is 315).
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param pov The index of the POV to read (starting at 0)
|
||||
* @return the angle of the POV in degrees, or -1 if the POV is not pressed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetPOV(int pov = 0) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the number of axes for the HID.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return the number of axis for the current HID
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetAxisCount() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the number of POVs for the HID.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return the number of POVs for the current HID
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetPOVCount() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the number of buttons for the HID.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return the number of buttons on the current HID
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetButtonCount() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the type of the HID.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return the type of the HID.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
GenericHID::HIDType GetType() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the name of the HID.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return the name of the HID.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
std::string GetName() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the axis type of a joystick axis.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return the axis type of a joystick axis.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetAxisType(int axis) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the port number of the HID.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The port number of the HID.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetPort() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set a single HID output value for the HID.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param outputNumber The index of the output to set (1-32)
|
||||
* @param value The value to set the output to
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetOutput(int outputNumber, bool value);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set all output values for the HID.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param value The 32 bit output value (1 bit for each output)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetOutputs(int value);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the rumble output for the HID.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The DS currently supports 2 rumble values, left rumble and right rumble.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param type Which rumble value to set
|
||||
* @param value The normalized value (0 to 1) to set the rumble to
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetRumble(RumbleType type, double value);
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -24,6 +24,12 @@ class GyroBase : public Gyro,
|
||||
public PIDSource {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
// PIDSource interface
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the PIDOutput for the PIDSource base object. Can be set to return
|
||||
* angle or rate using SetPIDSourceType(). Defaults to angle.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The PIDOutput (angle or rate, defaults to angle)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double PIDGet() override;
|
||||
|
||||
void InitSendable(SendableBuilder& builder) override;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -25,19 +25,113 @@ class I2C : public ErrorBase {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
enum Port { kOnboard = 0, kMXP };
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Constructor.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param port The I2C port to which the device is connected.
|
||||
* @param deviceAddress The address of the device on the I2C bus.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
I2C(Port port, int deviceAddress);
|
||||
|
||||
~I2C() override;
|
||||
|
||||
I2C(const I2C&) = delete;
|
||||
I2C& operator=(const I2C&) = delete;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Generic transaction.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This is a lower-level interface to the I2C hardware giving you more control
|
||||
* over each transaction.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param dataToSend Buffer of data to send as part of the transaction.
|
||||
* @param sendSize Number of bytes to send as part of the transaction.
|
||||
* @param dataReceived Buffer to read data into.
|
||||
* @param receiveSize Number of bytes to read from the device.
|
||||
* @return Transfer Aborted... false for success, true for aborted.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Transaction(uint8_t* dataToSend, int sendSize, uint8_t* dataReceived,
|
||||
int receiveSize);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Attempt to address a device on the I2C bus.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This allows you to figure out if there is a device on the I2C bus that
|
||||
* responds to the address specified in the constructor.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Transfer Aborted... false for success, true for aborted.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool AddressOnly();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Execute a write transaction with the device.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Write a single byte to a register on a device and wait until the
|
||||
* transaction is complete.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param registerAddress The address of the register on the device to be
|
||||
* written.
|
||||
* @param data The byte to write to the register on the device.
|
||||
* @return Transfer Aborted... false for success, true for aborted.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Write(int registerAddress, uint8_t data);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Execute a bulk write transaction with the device.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Write multiple bytes to a device and wait until the
|
||||
* transaction is complete.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param data The data to write to the register on the device.
|
||||
* @param count The number of bytes to be written.
|
||||
* @return Transfer Aborted... false for success, true for aborted.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool WriteBulk(uint8_t* data, int count);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Execute a read transaction with the device.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Read bytes from a device.
|
||||
* Most I2C devices will auto-increment the register pointer internally
|
||||
* allowing you to read consecutive registers on a device in a single
|
||||
* transaction.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param registerAddress The register to read first in the transaction.
|
||||
* @param count The number of bytes to read in the transaction.
|
||||
* @param buffer A pointer to the array of bytes to store the data
|
||||
* read from the device.
|
||||
* @return Transfer Aborted... false for success, true for aborted.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Read(int registerAddress, int count, uint8_t* data);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Execute a read only transaction with the device.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Read bytes from a device. This method does not write any data to prompt the
|
||||
* device.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param buffer A pointer to the array of bytes to store the data read from
|
||||
* the device.
|
||||
* @param count The number of bytes to read in the transaction.
|
||||
* @return Transfer Aborted... false for success, true for aborted.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool ReadOnly(int count, uint8_t* buffer);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Verify that a device's registers contain expected values.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Most devices will have a set of registers that contain a known value that
|
||||
* can be used to identify them. This allows an I2C device driver to easily
|
||||
* verify that the device contains the expected value.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @pre The device must support and be configured to use register
|
||||
* auto-increment.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param registerAddress The base register to start reading from the device.
|
||||
* @param count The size of the field to be verified.
|
||||
* @param expected A buffer containing the values expected from the
|
||||
* device.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool VerifySensor(int registerAddress, int count, const uint8_t* expected);
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -29,36 +29,95 @@ class InterruptableSensorBase : public ErrorBase, public SendableBase {
|
||||
virtual HAL_Handle GetPortHandleForRouting() const = 0;
|
||||
virtual AnalogTriggerType GetAnalogTriggerTypeForRouting() const = 0;
|
||||
|
||||
// Asynchronous handler version.
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Request one of the 8 interrupts asynchronously on this digital input.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Request interrupts in asynchronous mode where the user's interrupt handler
|
||||
* will be called when the interrupt fires. Users that want control over the
|
||||
* thread priority should use the synchronous method with their own spawned
|
||||
* thread. The default is interrupt on rising edges only.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void RequestInterrupts(HAL_InterruptHandlerFunction handler,
|
||||
void* param);
|
||||
|
||||
// Synchronous wait version.
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Request one of the 8 interrupts synchronously on this digital input.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Request interrupts in synchronous mode where the user program will have to
|
||||
* explicitly wait for the interrupt to occur using WaitForInterrupt.
|
||||
* The default is interrupt on rising edges only.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void RequestInterrupts();
|
||||
|
||||
// Free up the underlying ChipObject functions.
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Cancel interrupts on this device.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This deallocates all the chipobject structures and disables any interrupts.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void CancelInterrupts();
|
||||
|
||||
// Synchronous version.
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* In synchronous mode, wait for the defined interrupt to occur.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* You should <b>NOT</b> attempt to read the sensor from another thread while
|
||||
* waiting for an interrupt. This is not threadsafe, and can cause memory
|
||||
* corruption
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param timeout Timeout in seconds
|
||||
* @param ignorePrevious If true, ignore interrupts that happened before
|
||||
* WaitForInterrupt was called.
|
||||
* @return What interrupts fired
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual WaitResult WaitForInterrupt(double timeout,
|
||||
bool ignorePrevious = true);
|
||||
|
||||
// Enable interrupts - after finishing setup.
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Enable interrupts to occur on this input.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Interrupts are disabled when the RequestInterrupt call is made. This gives
|
||||
* time to do the setup of the other options before starting to field
|
||||
* interrupts.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void EnableInterrupts();
|
||||
|
||||
// Disable, but don't deallocate.
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Disable Interrupts without without deallocating structures.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void DisableInterrupts();
|
||||
|
||||
// Return the timestamp for the rising interrupt that occurred.
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Return the timestamp for the rising interrupt that occurred most recently.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This is in the same time domain as GetClock().
|
||||
* The rising-edge interrupt should be enabled with
|
||||
* {@link #DigitalInput.SetUpSourceEdge}
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Timestamp in seconds since boot.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual double ReadRisingTimestamp();
|
||||
|
||||
// Return the timestamp for the falling interrupt that occurred.
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Return the timestamp for the falling interrupt that occurred most recently.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This is in the same time domain as GetClock().
|
||||
* The falling-edge interrupt should be enabled with
|
||||
* {@link #DigitalInput.SetUpSourceEdge}
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Timestamp in seconds since boot.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual double ReadFallingTimestamp();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set which edge to trigger interrupts on
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param risingEdge true to interrupt on rising edge
|
||||
* @param fallingEdge true to interrupt on falling edge
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void SetUpSourceEdge(bool risingEdge, bool fallingEdge);
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
HAL_InterruptHandle m_interrupt = HAL_kInvalidHandle;
|
||||
|
||||
void AllocateInterrupts(bool watcher);
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -25,6 +25,12 @@ class IterativeRobot : public IterativeRobotBase {
|
||||
IterativeRobot();
|
||||
virtual ~IterativeRobot() = default;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Provide an alternate "main loop" via StartCompetition().
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This specific StartCompetition() implements "main loop" behaviour synced
|
||||
* with the DS packets.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void StartCompetition() override;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -42,16 +42,95 @@ namespace frc {
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class IterativeRobotBase : public RobotBase {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Robot-wide initialization code should go here.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Users should override this method for default Robot-wide initialization
|
||||
* which will be called when the robot is first powered on. It will be called
|
||||
* exactly one time.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Warning: the Driver Station "Robot Code" light and FMS "Robot Ready"
|
||||
* indicators will be off until RobotInit() exits. Code in RobotInit() that
|
||||
* waits for enable will cause the robot to never indicate that the code is
|
||||
* ready, causing the robot to be bypassed in a match.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void RobotInit();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Initialization code for disabled mode should go here.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Users should override this method for initialization code which will be
|
||||
* called each time
|
||||
* the robot enters disabled mode.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void DisabledInit();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Initialization code for autonomous mode should go here.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Users should override this method for initialization code which will be
|
||||
* called each time the robot enters autonomous mode.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void AutonomousInit();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Initialization code for teleop mode should go here.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Users should override this method for initialization code which will be
|
||||
* called each time the robot enters teleop mode.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void TeleopInit();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Initialization code for test mode should go here.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Users should override this method for initialization code which will be
|
||||
* called each time the robot enters test mode.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void TestInit();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Periodic code for all modes should go here.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This function is called each time a new packet is received from the driver
|
||||
* station.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void RobotPeriodic();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Periodic code for disabled mode should go here.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Users should override this method for code which will be called each time a
|
||||
* new packet is received from the driver station and the robot is in disabled
|
||||
* mode.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void DisabledPeriodic();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Periodic code for autonomous mode should go here.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Users should override this method for code which will be called each time a
|
||||
* new packet is received from the driver station and the robot is in
|
||||
* autonomous mode.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void AutonomousPeriodic();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Periodic code for teleop mode should go here.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Users should override this method for code which will be called each time a
|
||||
* new packet is received from the driver station and the robot is in teleop
|
||||
* mode.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void TeleopPeriodic();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Periodic code for test mode should go here.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Users should override this method for code which will be called each time a
|
||||
* new packet is received from the driver station and the robot is in test
|
||||
* mode.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void TestPeriodic();
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -16,6 +16,12 @@ namespace frc {
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class Jaguar : public PWMSpeedController {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Constructor for a Jaguar connected via PWM.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param channel The PWM channel that the Jaguar is attached to. 0-9 are
|
||||
* on-board, 10-19 are on the MXP port
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit Jaguar(int channel);
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -45,55 +45,240 @@ class Joystick : public GenericHID {
|
||||
enum AxisType { kXAxis, kYAxis, kZAxis, kTwistAxis, kThrottleAxis };
|
||||
enum ButtonType { kTriggerButton, kTopButton };
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Construct an instance of a joystick.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The joystick index is the USB port on the Driver Station.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param port The port on the Driver Station that the joystick is plugged
|
||||
* into (0-5).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit Joystick(int port);
|
||||
|
||||
virtual ~Joystick() = default;
|
||||
|
||||
Joystick(const Joystick&) = delete;
|
||||
Joystick& operator=(const Joystick&) = delete;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the channel associated with the X axis.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param channel The channel to set the axis to.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetXChannel(int channel);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the channel associated with the Y axis.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param axis The axis to set the channel for.
|
||||
* @param channel The channel to set the axis to.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetYChannel(int channel);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the channel associated with the Z axis.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param axis The axis to set the channel for.
|
||||
* @param channel The channel to set the axis to.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetZChannel(int channel);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the channel associated with the twist axis.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param axis The axis to set the channel for.
|
||||
* @param channel The channel to set the axis to.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetTwistChannel(int channel);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the channel associated with the throttle axis.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param axis The axis to set the channel for.
|
||||
* @param channel The channel to set the axis to.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetThrottleChannel(int channel);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the channel associated with a specified axis.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param axis The axis to set the channel for.
|
||||
* @param channel The channel to set the axis to.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("Use the more specific axis channel setter functions.")
|
||||
void SetAxisChannel(AxisType axis, int channel);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the channel currently associated with the X axis.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The channel for the axis.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetXChannel() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the channel currently associated with the Y axis.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The channel for the axis.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetYChannel() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the channel currently associated with the Z axis.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The channel for the axis.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetZChannel() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the channel currently associated with the twist axis.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The channel for the axis.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetTwistChannel() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the channel currently associated with the throttle axis.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The channel for the axis.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetThrottleChannel() const;
|
||||
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("Use the more specific axis channel getter functions.")
|
||||
int GetAxisChannel(AxisType axis) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the X value of the joystick.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This depends on the mapping of the joystick connected to the current port.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param hand This parameter is ignored for the Joystick class and is only
|
||||
* here to complete the GenericHID interface.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetX(JoystickHand hand = kRightHand) const override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the Y value of the joystick.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This depends on the mapping of the joystick connected to the current port.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param hand This parameter is ignored for the Joystick class and is only
|
||||
* here to complete the GenericHID interface.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetY(JoystickHand hand = kRightHand) const override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the Z value of the current joystick.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This depends on the mapping of the joystick connected to the current port.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetZ() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the twist value of the current joystick.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This depends on the mapping of the joystick connected to the current port.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetTwist() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the throttle value of the current joystick.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This depends on the mapping of the joystick connected to the current port.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetThrottle() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* For the current joystick, return the axis determined by the argument.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This is for cases where the joystick axis is returned programatically,
|
||||
* otherwise one of the previous functions would be preferable (for example
|
||||
* GetX()).
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param axis The axis to read.
|
||||
* @return The value of the axis.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("Use the more specific axis channel getter functions.")
|
||||
double GetAxis(AxisType axis) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Read the state of the trigger on the joystick.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Look up which button has been assigned to the trigger and read its state.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The state of the trigger.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetTrigger() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Whether the trigger was pressed since the last check.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Whether the button was pressed since the last check.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetTriggerPressed();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Whether the trigger was released since the last check.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Whether the button was released since the last check.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetTriggerReleased();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Read the state of the top button on the joystick.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Look up which button has been assigned to the top and read its state.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The state of the top button.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetTop() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Whether the top button was pressed since the last check.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Whether the button was pressed since the last check.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetTopPressed();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Whether the top button was released since the last check.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Whether the button was released since the last check.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetTopReleased();
|
||||
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("Use Joystick instances instead.")
|
||||
static Joystick* GetStickForPort(int port);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get buttons based on an enumerated type.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The button type will be looked up in the list of buttons and then read.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param button The type of button to read.
|
||||
* @return The state of the button.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("Use the more specific button getter functions.")
|
||||
bool GetButton(ButtonType button) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the magnitude of the direction vector formed by the joystick's
|
||||
* current position relative to its origin.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The magnitude of the direction vector
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetMagnitude() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the direction of the vector formed by the joystick and its origin
|
||||
* in radians.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The direction of the vector in radians
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetDirectionRadians() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the direction of the vector formed by the joystick and its origin
|
||||
* in degrees.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The direction of the vector in degrees
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetDirectionDegrees() const;
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -25,51 +25,182 @@ class LiveWindow {
|
||||
LiveWindow(const LiveWindow&) = delete;
|
||||
LiveWindow& operator=(const LiveWindow&) = delete;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get an instance of the LiveWindow main class.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This is a singleton to guarantee that there is only a single instance
|
||||
* regardless of how many times GetInstance is called.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static LiveWindow* GetInstance();
|
||||
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("no longer required")
|
||||
void Run() { UpdateValues(); }
|
||||
void Run();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Add a Sensor associated with the subsystem and call it by the given name.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param subsystem The subsystem this component is part of.
|
||||
* @param name The name of this component.
|
||||
* @param component A Sendable component that represents a sensor.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("use Sendable::SetName() instead")
|
||||
void AddSensor(const wpi::Twine& subsystem, const wpi::Twine& name,
|
||||
Sendable* component);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Add a Sensor associated with the subsystem and call it by the given name.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param subsystem The subsystem this component is part of.
|
||||
* @param name The name of this component.
|
||||
* @param component A Sendable component that represents a sensor.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("use Sendable::SetName() instead")
|
||||
void AddSensor(const wpi::Twine& subsystem, const wpi::Twine& name,
|
||||
Sendable& component);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Add a Sensor associated with the subsystem and call it by the given name.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param subsystem The subsystem this component is part of.
|
||||
* @param name The name of this component.
|
||||
* @param component A Sendable component that represents a sensor.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("use Sendable::SetName() instead")
|
||||
void AddSensor(const wpi::Twine& subsystem, const wpi::Twine& name,
|
||||
std::shared_ptr<Sendable> component);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Add an Actuator associated with the subsystem and call it by the given
|
||||
* name.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param subsystem The subsystem this component is part of.
|
||||
* @param name The name of this component.
|
||||
* @param component A Sendable component that represents a actuator.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("use Sendable::SetName() instead")
|
||||
void AddActuator(const wpi::Twine& subsystem, const wpi::Twine& name,
|
||||
Sendable* component);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Add an Actuator associated with the subsystem and call it by the given
|
||||
* name.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param subsystem The subsystem this component is part of.
|
||||
* @param name The name of this component.
|
||||
* @param component A Sendable component that represents a actuator.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("use Sendable::SetName() instead")
|
||||
void AddActuator(const wpi::Twine& subsystem, const wpi::Twine& name,
|
||||
Sendable& component);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Add an Actuator associated with the subsystem and call it by the given
|
||||
* name.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param subsystem The subsystem this component is part of.
|
||||
* @param name The name of this component.
|
||||
* @param component A Sendable component that represents a actuator.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("use Sendable::SetName() instead")
|
||||
void AddActuator(const wpi::Twine& subsystem, const wpi::Twine& name,
|
||||
std::shared_ptr<Sendable> component);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Meant for internal use in other WPILib classes.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @deprecated Use SendableBase::SetName() instead.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("use SensorUtil::SetName() instead")
|
||||
void AddSensor(const wpi::Twine& type, int channel, Sendable* component);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Meant for internal use in other WPILib classes.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @deprecated Use SendableBase::SetName() instead.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("use SensorUtil::SetName() instead")
|
||||
void AddActuator(const wpi::Twine& type, int channel, Sendable* component);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Meant for internal use in other WPILib classes.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @deprecated Use SendableBase::SetName() instead.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("use SensorUtil::SetName() instead")
|
||||
void AddActuator(const wpi::Twine& type, int module, int channel,
|
||||
Sendable* component);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Add a component to the LiveWindow.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param sendable component to add
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Add(std::shared_ptr<Sendable> component);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Add a component to the LiveWindow.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param sendable component to add
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Add(Sendable* component);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Add a child component to a component.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param parent parent component
|
||||
* @param child child component
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void AddChild(Sendable* parent, std::shared_ptr<Sendable> component);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Add a child component to a component.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param parent parent component
|
||||
* @param child child component
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void AddChild(Sendable* parent, void* component);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Remove the component from the LiveWindow.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param sendable component to remove
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Remove(Sendable* component);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Enable telemetry for a single component.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param sendable component
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void EnableTelemetry(Sendable* component);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Disable telemetry for a single component.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param sendable component
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void DisableTelemetry(Sendable* component);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Disable ALL telemetry.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void DisableAllTelemetry();
|
||||
|
||||
bool IsEnabled() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Change the enabled status of LiveWindow.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* If it changes to enabled, start livewindow running otherwise stop it
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetEnabled(bool enabled);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Tell all the sensors to update (send) their values.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Actuators are handled through callbacks on their value changing from the
|
||||
* SmartDashboard widgets.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void UpdateValues();
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -19,15 +19,84 @@ class MotorSafety;
|
||||
|
||||
class MotorSafetyHelper : public ErrorBase {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* The constructor for a MotorSafetyHelper object.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The helper object is constructed for every object that wants to implement
|
||||
* the Motor Safety protocol. The helper object has the code to actually do
|
||||
* the timing and call the motors Stop() method when the timeout expires. The
|
||||
* motor object is expected to call the Feed() method whenever the motors
|
||||
* value is updated.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param safeObject a pointer to the motor object implementing MotorSafety.
|
||||
* This is used to call the Stop() method on the motor.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit MotorSafetyHelper(MotorSafety* safeObject);
|
||||
|
||||
~MotorSafetyHelper();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Feed the motor safety object.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Resets the timer on this object that is used to do the timeouts.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Feed();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the expiration time for the corresponding motor safety object.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param expirationTime The timeout value in seconds.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetExpiration(double expirationTime);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Retrieve the timeout value for the corresponding motor safety object.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return the timeout value in seconds.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetExpiration() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Determine if the motor is still operating or has timed out.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return a true value if the motor is still operating normally and hasn't
|
||||
* timed out.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsAlive() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Check if this motor has exceeded its timeout.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This method is called periodically to determine if this motor has exceeded
|
||||
* its timeout value. If it has, the stop method is called, and the motor is
|
||||
* shut down until its value is updated again.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Check();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Enable/disable motor safety for this device
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Turn on and off the motor safety option for this PWM object.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param enabled True if motor safety is enforced for this object
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetSafetyEnabled(bool enabled);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Return the state of the motor safety enabled flag
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Return if the motor safety is currently enabled for this devicce.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return True if motor safety is enforced for this device
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsSafetyEnabled() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Check the motors to see if any have timed out.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This static method is called periodically to poll all the motors and stop
|
||||
* any that have timed out.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void CheckMotors();
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -27,30 +27,103 @@ class NidecBrushless : public ErrorBase,
|
||||
public SpeedController,
|
||||
public MotorSafety {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Constructor.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param pwmChannel The PWM channel that the Nidec Brushless controller is
|
||||
* attached to. 0-9 are on-board, 10-19 are on the MXP port.
|
||||
* @param dioChannel The DIO channel that the Nidec Brushless controller is
|
||||
* attached to. 0-9 are on-board, 10-25 are on the MXP port.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
NidecBrushless(int pwmChannel, int dioChannel);
|
||||
|
||||
~NidecBrushless() override = default;
|
||||
|
||||
// SpeedController interface
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the PWM value.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The PWM value is set using a range of -1.0 to 1.0, appropriately scaling
|
||||
* the value for the FPGA.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param speed The speed value between -1.0 and 1.0 to set.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Set(double speed) override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the recently set value of the PWM.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The most recently set value for the PWM between -1.0 and 1.0.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double Get() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
void SetInverted(bool isInverted) override;
|
||||
|
||||
bool GetInverted() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Disable the motor. The Enable() function must be called to re-enable the
|
||||
* motor.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Disable() override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Stop the motor.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This is called by the MotorSafetyHelper object when it has a timeout for
|
||||
* this PWM and needs to stop it from running. Calling Set() will re-enable
|
||||
* the motor.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void StopMotor() override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Re-enable the motor after Disable() has been called. The Set() function
|
||||
* must be called to set a new motor speed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Enable();
|
||||
|
||||
// PIDOutput interface
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Write out the PID value as seen in the PIDOutput base object.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param output Write out the PWM value as was found in the PIDController
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void PIDWrite(double output) override;
|
||||
|
||||
// MotorSafety interface
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the safety expiration time.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param timeout The timeout (in seconds) for this motor object
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetExpiration(double timeout) override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Return the safety expiration time.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The expiration time value.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetExpiration() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Check if the motor is currently alive or stopped due to a timeout.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return a bool value that is true if the motor has NOT timed out and should
|
||||
* still be running.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsAlive() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
void SetSafetyEnabled(bool enabled) override;
|
||||
|
||||
bool IsSafetyEnabled() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
void GetDescription(wpi::raw_ostream& desc) const override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Gets the channel number associated with the object.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The channel number.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetChannel() const;
|
||||
|
||||
// Sendable interface
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -25,6 +25,12 @@ typedef std::function<void()> TimerEventHandler;
|
||||
|
||||
class Notifier : public ErrorBase {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Create a Notifier for timer event notification.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param handler The handler is called at the notification time which is set
|
||||
* using StartSingle or StartPeriodic.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit Notifier(TimerEventHandler handler);
|
||||
|
||||
template <typename Callable, typename Arg, typename... Args>
|
||||
@@ -32,23 +38,65 @@ class Notifier : public ErrorBase {
|
||||
: Notifier(std::bind(std::forward<Callable>(f), std::forward<Arg>(arg),
|
||||
std::forward<Args>(args)...)) {}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Free the resources for a timer event.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual ~Notifier();
|
||||
|
||||
Notifier(const Notifier&) = delete;
|
||||
Notifier& operator=(const Notifier&) = delete;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Change the handler function.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param handler Handler
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetHandler(TimerEventHandler handler);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Register for single event notification.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* A timer event is queued for a single event after the specified delay.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param delay Seconds to wait before the handler is called.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void StartSingle(double delay);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Register for periodic event notification.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* A timer event is queued for periodic event notification. Each time the
|
||||
* interrupt occurs, the event will be immediately requeued for the same time
|
||||
* interval.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param period Period in seconds to call the handler starting one period
|
||||
* after the call to this method.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void StartPeriodic(double period);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Stop timer events from occuring.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Stop any repeating timer events from occuring. This will also remove any
|
||||
* single notification events from the queue.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* If a timer-based call to the registered handler is in progress, this
|
||||
* function will block until the handler call is complete.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Stop();
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
// update the HAL alarm
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Update the HAL alarm time.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void UpdateAlarm();
|
||||
// the thread waiting on the HAL alarm
|
||||
|
||||
// The thread waiting on the HAL alarm
|
||||
std::thread m_thread;
|
||||
// held while updating process information
|
||||
|
||||
// Held while updating process information
|
||||
wpi::mutex m_processMutex;
|
||||
|
||||
// HAL handle, atomic for proper destruction
|
||||
std::atomic<HAL_NotifierHandle> m_notifier{0};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -35,53 +35,267 @@ namespace frc {
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class PIDBase : public SendableBase, public PIDInterface, public PIDOutput {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Allocate a PID object with the given constants for P, I, D.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param Kp the proportional coefficient
|
||||
* @param Ki the integral coefficient
|
||||
* @param Kd the derivative coefficient
|
||||
* @param source The PIDSource object that is used to get values
|
||||
* @param output The PIDOutput object that is set to the output value
|
||||
*/
|
||||
PIDBase(double p, double i, double d, PIDSource& source, PIDOutput& output);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Allocate a PID object with the given constants for P, I, D.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param Kp the proportional coefficient
|
||||
* @param Ki the integral coefficient
|
||||
* @param Kd the derivative coefficient
|
||||
* @param source The PIDSource object that is used to get values
|
||||
* @param output The PIDOutput object that is set to the output value
|
||||
*/
|
||||
PIDBase(double p, double i, double d, double f, PIDSource& source,
|
||||
PIDOutput& output);
|
||||
|
||||
~PIDBase() override = default;
|
||||
|
||||
PIDBase(const PIDBase&) = delete;
|
||||
PIDBase& operator=(const PIDBase) = delete;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Return the current PID result.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This is always centered on zero and constrained the the max and min outs.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return the latest calculated output
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual double Get() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the PID controller to consider the input to be continuous,
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Rather then using the max and min input range as constraints, it considers
|
||||
* them to be the same point and automatically calculates the shortest route
|
||||
* to the setpoint.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param continuous true turns on continuous, false turns off continuous
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void SetContinuous(bool continuous = true);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Sets the maximum and minimum values expected from the input.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param minimumInput the minimum value expected from the input
|
||||
* @param maximumInput the maximum value expected from the output
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void SetInputRange(double minimumInput, double maximumInput);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Sets the minimum and maximum values to write.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param minimumOutput the minimum value to write to the output
|
||||
* @param maximumOutput the maximum value to write to the output
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void SetOutputRange(double minimumOutput, double maximumOutput);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the PID Controller gain parameters.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Set the proportional, integral, and differential coefficients.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param p Proportional coefficient
|
||||
* @param i Integral coefficient
|
||||
* @param d Differential coefficient
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetPID(double p, double i, double d) override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the PID Controller gain parameters.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Set the proportional, integral, and differential coefficients.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param p Proportional coefficient
|
||||
* @param i Integral coefficient
|
||||
* @param d Differential coefficient
|
||||
* @param f Feed forward coefficient
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void SetPID(double p, double i, double d, double f);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the Proportional coefficient of the PID controller gain.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param p proportional coefficient
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetP(double p);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the Integral coefficient of the PID controller gain.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param i integral coefficient
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetI(double i);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the Differential coefficient of the PID controller gain.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param d differential coefficient
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetD(double d);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the Feed forward coefficient of the PID controller gain.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param f Feed forward coefficient
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetF(double f);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the Proportional coefficient.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return proportional coefficient
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetP() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the Integral coefficient.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return integral coefficient
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetI() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the Differential coefficient.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return differential coefficient
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetD() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the Feed forward coefficient.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Feed forward coefficient
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual double GetF() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the setpoint for the PIDBase.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param setpoint the desired setpoint
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetSetpoint(double setpoint) override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns the current setpoint of the PIDBase.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return the current setpoint
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetSetpoint() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns the change in setpoint over time of the PIDBase.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return the change in setpoint over time
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetDeltaSetpoint() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns the current difference of the input from the setpoint.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return the current error
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual double GetError() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns the current average of the error over the past few iterations.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* You can specify the number of iterations to average with
|
||||
* SetToleranceBuffer() (defaults to 1). This is the same value that is used
|
||||
* for OnTarget().
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return the average error
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("Use a LinearDigitalFilter as the input and GetError().")
|
||||
virtual double GetAvgError() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Sets what type of input the PID controller will use.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void SetPIDSourceType(PIDSourceType pidSource);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns the type of input the PID controller is using.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return the PID controller input type
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual PIDSourceType GetPIDSourceType() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the percentage error which is considered tolerable for use with
|
||||
* OnTarget.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param percentage error which is tolerable
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("Use SetPercentTolerance() instead.")
|
||||
virtual void SetTolerance(double percent);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the absolute error which is considered tolerable for use with
|
||||
* OnTarget.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param percentage error which is tolerable
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void SetAbsoluteTolerance(double absValue);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the percentage error which is considered tolerable for use with
|
||||
* OnTarget.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param percentage error which is tolerable
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void SetPercentTolerance(double percentValue);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the number of previous error samples to average for tolerancing. When
|
||||
* determining whether a mechanism is on target, the user may want to use a
|
||||
* rolling average of previous measurements instead of a precise position or
|
||||
* velocity. This is useful for noisy sensors which return a few erroneous
|
||||
* measurements when the mechanism is on target. However, the mechanism will
|
||||
* not register as on target for at least the specified bufLength cycles.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param bufLength Number of previous cycles to average. Defaults to 1.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("Use a LinearDigitalFilter as the input.")
|
||||
virtual void SetToleranceBuffer(int buf = 1);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Return true if the error is within the percentage of the total input range,
|
||||
* determined by SetTolerance. This asssumes that the maximum and minimum
|
||||
* input were set using SetInput.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Currently this just reports on target as the actual value passes through
|
||||
* the setpoint. Ideally it should be based on being within the tolerance for
|
||||
* some period of time.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This will return false until at least one input value has been computed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual bool OnTarget() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Reset the previous error, the integral term, and disable the controller.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Reset() override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Passes the output directly to SetSetpoint().
|
||||
*
|
||||
* PIDControllers can be nested by passing a PIDController as another
|
||||
* PIDController's output. In that case, the output of the parent controller
|
||||
* becomes the input (i.e., the reference) of the child.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* It is the caller's responsibility to put the data into a valid form for
|
||||
* SetSetpoint().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void PIDWrite(double output) override;
|
||||
|
||||
void InitSendable(SendableBuilder& builder) override;
|
||||
@@ -100,8 +314,36 @@ class PIDBase : public SendableBase, public PIDInterface, public PIDOutput {
|
||||
PIDOutput* m_pidOutput;
|
||||
Timer m_setpointTimer;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Read the input, calculate the output accordingly, and write to the output.
|
||||
* This should only be called by the Notifier.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void Calculate();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Calculate the feed forward term.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Both of the provided feed forward calculations are velocity feed forwards.
|
||||
* If a different feed forward calculation is desired, the user can override
|
||||
* this function and provide his or her own. This function does no
|
||||
* synchronization because the PIDBase class only calls it in synchronized
|
||||
* code, so be careful if calling it oneself.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* If a velocity PID controller is being used, the F term should be set to 1
|
||||
* over the maximum setpoint for the output. If a position PID controller is
|
||||
* being used, the F term should be set to 1 over the maximum speed for the
|
||||
* output measured in setpoint units per this controller's update period (see
|
||||
* the default period in this class's constructor).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual double CalculateFeedForward();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Wraps error around for continuous inputs. The original error is returned if
|
||||
* continuous mode is disabled. This is an unsynchronized function.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param error The current error of the PID controller.
|
||||
* @return Error for continuous inputs.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetContinuousError(double error) const;
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -37,24 +37,95 @@ class PIDOutput;
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class PIDController : public PIDBase, public Controller {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Allocate a PID object with the given constants for P, I, D.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param Kp the proportional coefficient
|
||||
* @param Ki the integral coefficient
|
||||
* @param Kd the derivative coefficient
|
||||
* @param source The PIDSource object that is used to get values
|
||||
* @param output The PIDOutput object that is set to the output value
|
||||
* @param period the loop time for doing calculations. This particularly
|
||||
* effects calculations of the integral and differental terms.
|
||||
* The default is 50ms.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
PIDController(double p, double i, double d, PIDSource* source,
|
||||
PIDOutput* output, double period = 0.05);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Allocate a PID object with the given constants for P, I, D.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param Kp the proportional coefficient
|
||||
* @param Ki the integral coefficient
|
||||
* @param Kd the derivative coefficient
|
||||
* @param source The PIDSource object that is used to get values
|
||||
* @param output The PIDOutput object that is set to the output value
|
||||
* @param period the loop time for doing calculations. This particularly
|
||||
* effects calculations of the integral and differental terms.
|
||||
* The default is 50ms.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
PIDController(double p, double i, double d, double f, PIDSource* source,
|
||||
PIDOutput* output, double period = 0.05);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Allocate a PID object with the given constants for P, I, D.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param Kp the proportional coefficient
|
||||
* @param Ki the integral coefficient
|
||||
* @param Kd the derivative coefficient
|
||||
* @param source The PIDSource object that is used to get values
|
||||
* @param output The PIDOutput object that is set to the output value
|
||||
* @param period the loop time for doing calculations. This particularly
|
||||
* effects calculations of the integral and differental terms.
|
||||
* The default is 50ms.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
PIDController(double p, double i, double d, PIDSource& source,
|
||||
PIDOutput& output, double period = 0.05);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Allocate a PID object with the given constants for P, I, D.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param Kp the proportional coefficient
|
||||
* @param Ki the integral coefficient
|
||||
* @param Kd the derivative coefficient
|
||||
* @param source The PIDSource object that is used to get values
|
||||
* @param output The PIDOutput object that is set to the output value
|
||||
* @param period the loop time for doing calculations. This particularly
|
||||
* effects calculations of the integral and differental terms.
|
||||
* The default is 50ms.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
PIDController(double p, double i, double d, double f, PIDSource& source,
|
||||
PIDOutput& output, double period = 0.05);
|
||||
|
||||
~PIDController() override;
|
||||
|
||||
PIDController(const PIDController&) = delete;
|
||||
PIDController& operator=(const PIDController) = delete;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Begin running the PIDController.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Enable() override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Stop running the PIDController, this sets the output to zero before
|
||||
* stopping.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Disable() override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the enabled state of the PIDController.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetEnabled(bool enable);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Return true if PIDController is enabled.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsEnabled() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Reset the previous error, the integral term, and disable the controller.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Reset() override;
|
||||
|
||||
void InitSendable(SendableBuilder& builder) override;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -19,8 +19,15 @@ enum class PIDSourceType { kDisplacement, kRate };
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class PIDSource {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set which parameter you are using as a process control variable.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param pidSource An enum to select the parameter.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void SetPIDSourceType(PIDSourceType pidSource);
|
||||
|
||||
virtual PIDSourceType GetPIDSourceType() const;
|
||||
|
||||
virtual double PIDGet() = 0;
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -53,25 +53,170 @@ class PWM : public ErrorBase, public SendableBase {
|
||||
kPeriodMultiplier_4X = 4
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Allocate a PWM given a channel number.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Checks channel value range and allocates the appropriate channel.
|
||||
* The allocation is only done to help users ensure that they don't double
|
||||
* assign channels.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param channel The PWM channel number. 0-9 are on-board, 10-19 are on the
|
||||
* MXP port
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit PWM(int channel);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Free the PWM channel.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Free the resource associated with the PWM channel and set the value to 0.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
~PWM() override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the PWM value directly to the hardware.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Write a raw value to a PWM channel.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param value Raw PWM value.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void SetRaw(uint16_t value);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the PWM value directly from the hardware.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Read a raw value from a PWM channel.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Raw PWM control value.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual uint16_t GetRaw() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the PWM value based on a position.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This is intended to be used by servos.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @pre SetMaxPositivePwm() called.
|
||||
* @pre SetMinNegativePwm() called.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param pos The position to set the servo between 0.0 and 1.0.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void SetPosition(double pos);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the PWM value in terms of a position.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This is intended to be used by servos.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @pre SetMaxPositivePwm() called.
|
||||
* @pre SetMinNegativePwm() called.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The position the servo is set to between 0.0 and 1.0.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual double GetPosition() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the PWM value based on a speed.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This is intended to be used by speed controllers.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @pre SetMaxPositivePwm() called.
|
||||
* @pre SetMinPositivePwm() called.
|
||||
* @pre SetCenterPwm() called.
|
||||
* @pre SetMaxNegativePwm() called.
|
||||
* @pre SetMinNegativePwm() called.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param speed The speed to set the speed controller between -1.0 and 1.0.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void SetSpeed(double speed);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the PWM value in terms of speed.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This is intended to be used by speed controllers.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @pre SetMaxPositivePwm() called.
|
||||
* @pre SetMinPositivePwm() called.
|
||||
* @pre SetMaxNegativePwm() called.
|
||||
* @pre SetMinNegativePwm() called.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The most recently set speed between -1.0 and 1.0.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual double GetSpeed() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Temporarily disables the PWM output. The next set call will reenable
|
||||
* the output.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void SetDisabled();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Slow down the PWM signal for old devices.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param mult The period multiplier to apply to this channel
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetPeriodMultiplier(PeriodMultiplier mult);
|
||||
|
||||
void SetZeroLatch();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Optionally eliminate the deadband from a speed controller.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param eliminateDeadband If true, set the motor curve on the Jaguar to
|
||||
* eliminate the deadband in the middle of the range.
|
||||
* Otherwise, keep the full range without modifying
|
||||
* any values.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void EnableDeadbandElimination(bool eliminateDeadband);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the bounds on the PWM pulse widths.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This sets the bounds on the PWM values for a particular type of controller.
|
||||
* The values determine the upper and lower speeds as well as the deadband
|
||||
* bracket.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param max The max PWM pulse width in ms
|
||||
* @param deadbandMax The high end of the deadband range pulse width in ms
|
||||
* @param center The center (off) pulse width in ms
|
||||
* @param deadbandMin The low end of the deadband pulse width in ms
|
||||
* @param min The minimum pulse width in ms
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetBounds(double max, double deadbandMax, double center,
|
||||
double deadbandMin, double min);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the bounds on the PWM values.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This sets the bounds on the PWM values for a particular each type of
|
||||
* controller. The values determine the upper and lower speeds as well as the
|
||||
* deadband bracket.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param max The Minimum pwm value
|
||||
* @param deadbandMax The high end of the deadband range
|
||||
* @param center The center speed (off)
|
||||
* @param deadbandMin The low end of the deadband range
|
||||
* @param min The minimum pwm value
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetRawBounds(int max, int deadbandMax, int center, int deadbandMin,
|
||||
int min);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the bounds on the PWM values.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This Gets the bounds on the PWM values for a particular each type of
|
||||
* controller. The values determine the upper and lower speeds as well as the
|
||||
* deadband bracket.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param max The Minimum pwm value
|
||||
* @param deadbandMax The high end of the deadband range
|
||||
* @param center The center speed (off)
|
||||
* @param deadbandMin The low end of the deadband range
|
||||
* @param min The minimum pwm value
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetRawBounds(int32_t* max, int32_t* deadbandMax, int32_t* center,
|
||||
int32_t* deadbandMin, int32_t* min);
|
||||
int GetChannel() const { return m_channel; }
|
||||
|
||||
int GetChannel() const;
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
void InitSendable(SendableBuilder& builder) override;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -17,17 +17,47 @@ namespace frc {
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class PWMSpeedController : public SafePWM, public SpeedController {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the PWM value.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The PWM value is set using a range of -1.0 to 1.0, appropriately scaling
|
||||
* the value for the FPGA.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param speed The speed value between -1.0 and 1.0 to set.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Set(double value) override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the recently set value of the PWM.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The most recently set value for the PWM between -1.0 and 1.0.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double Get() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
void SetInverted(bool isInverted) override;
|
||||
|
||||
bool GetInverted() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
void Disable() override;
|
||||
|
||||
void StopMotor() override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Write out the PID value as seen in the PIDOutput base object.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param output Write out the PWM value as was found in the PIDController
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void PIDWrite(double output) override;
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Constructor for a PWM Speed Controller connected via PWM.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param channel The PWM channel that the controller is attached to. 0-9 are
|
||||
* on-board, 10-19 are on the MXP port
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit PWMSpeedController(int channel);
|
||||
|
||||
void InitSendable(SendableBuilder& builder) override;
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -17,6 +17,12 @@ namespace frc {
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class PWMTalonSRX : public PWMSpeedController {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Construct a PWMTalonSRX connected via PWM.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param channel The PWM channel that the PWMTalonSRX is attached to. 0-9 are
|
||||
* on-board, 10-19 are on the MXP port
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit PWMTalonSRX(int channel);
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -17,6 +17,12 @@ namespace frc {
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class PWMVictorSPX : public PWMSpeedController {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Construct a PWMVictorSPX connected via PWM.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param channel The PWM channel that the PWMVictorSPX is attached to. 0-9
|
||||
* are on-board, 10-19 are on the MXP port
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit PWMVictorSPX(int channel);
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -21,13 +21,58 @@ class PowerDistributionPanel : public ErrorBase, public SendableBase {
|
||||
PowerDistributionPanel();
|
||||
explicit PowerDistributionPanel(int module);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Query the input voltage of the PDP.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The voltage of the PDP in volts
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetVoltage() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Query the temperature of the PDP.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The temperature of the PDP in degrees Celsius
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetTemperature() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Query the current of a single channel of the PDP.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The current of one of the PDP channels (channels 0-15) in Amperes
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetCurrent(int channel) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Query the total current of all monitored PDP channels (0-15).
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The the total current drawn from the PDP channels in Amperes
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetTotalCurrent() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Query the total power drawn from the monitored PDP channels.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The the total power drawn from the PDP channels in Watts
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetTotalPower() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Query the total energy drawn from the monitored PDP channels.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The the total energy drawn from the PDP channels in Joules
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetTotalEnergy() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Reset the total energy drawn from the PDP.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @see PowerDistributionPanel#GetTotalEnergy
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void ResetTotalEnergy();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Remove all of the fault flags on the PDP.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void ClearStickyFaults();
|
||||
|
||||
void InitSendable(SendableBuilder& builder) override;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -35,23 +35,160 @@ namespace frc {
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class Preferences : public ErrorBase {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the one and only {@link Preferences} object.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return pointer to the {@link Preferences}
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static Preferences* GetInstance();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns a vector of all the keys.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return a vector of the keys
|
||||
*/
|
||||
std::vector<std::string> GetKeys();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns the string at the given key. If this table does not have a value
|
||||
* for that position, then the given defaultValue will be returned.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param key the key
|
||||
* @param defaultValue the value to return if none exists in the table
|
||||
* @return either the value in the table, or the defaultValue
|
||||
*/
|
||||
std::string GetString(wpi::StringRef key, wpi::StringRef defaultValue = "");
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns the int at the given key. If this table does not have a value for
|
||||
* that position, then the given defaultValue value will be returned.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param key the key
|
||||
* @param defaultValue the value to return if none exists in the table
|
||||
* @return either the value in the table, or the defaultValue
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetInt(wpi::StringRef key, int defaultValue = 0);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns the double at the given key. If this table does not have a value
|
||||
* for that position, then the given defaultValue value will be returned.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param key the key
|
||||
* @param defaultValue the value to return if none exists in the table
|
||||
* @return either the value in the table, or the defaultValue
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetDouble(wpi::StringRef key, double defaultValue = 0.0);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns the float at the given key. If this table does not have a value
|
||||
* for that position, then the given defaultValue value will be returned.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param key the key
|
||||
* @param defaultValue the value to return if none exists in the table
|
||||
* @return either the value in the table, or the defaultValue
|
||||
*/
|
||||
float GetFloat(wpi::StringRef key, float defaultValue = 0.0);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns the boolean at the given key. If this table does not have a value
|
||||
* for that position, then the given defaultValue value will be returned.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param key the key
|
||||
* @param defaultValue the value to return if none exists in the table
|
||||
* @return either the value in the table, or the defaultValue
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetBoolean(wpi::StringRef key, bool defaultValue = false);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns the long (int64_t) at the given key. If this table does not have a
|
||||
* value for that position, then the given defaultValue value will be
|
||||
* returned.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param key the key
|
||||
* @param defaultValue the value to return if none exists in the table
|
||||
* @return either the value in the table, or the defaultValue
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int64_t GetLong(wpi::StringRef key, int64_t defaultValue = 0);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Puts the given string into the preferences table.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The value may not have quotation marks, nor may the key have any whitespace
|
||||
* nor an equals sign.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param key the key
|
||||
* @param value the value
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void PutString(wpi::StringRef key, wpi::StringRef value);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Puts the given int into the preferences table.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The key may not have any whitespace nor an equals sign.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param key the key
|
||||
* @param value the value
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void PutInt(wpi::StringRef key, int value);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Puts the given double into the preferences table.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The key may not have any whitespace nor an equals sign.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param key the key
|
||||
* @param value the value
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void PutDouble(wpi::StringRef key, double value);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Puts the given float into the preferences table.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The key may not have any whitespace nor an equals sign.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param key the key
|
||||
* @param value the value
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void PutFloat(wpi::StringRef key, float value);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Puts the given boolean into the preferences table.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The key may not have any whitespace nor an equals sign.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param key the key
|
||||
* @param value the value
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void PutBoolean(wpi::StringRef key, bool value);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Puts the given long (int64_t) into the preferences table.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The key may not have any whitespace nor an equals sign.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param key the key
|
||||
* @param value the value
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void PutLong(wpi::StringRef key, int64_t value);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns whether or not there is a key with the given name.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param key the key
|
||||
* @return if there is a value at the given key
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool ContainsKey(wpi::StringRef key);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Remove a preference.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param key the key
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Remove(wpi::StringRef key);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Remove all preferences.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void RemoveAll();
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -37,19 +37,101 @@ class Relay : public MotorSafety, public ErrorBase, public SendableBase {
|
||||
enum Value { kOff, kOn, kForward, kReverse };
|
||||
enum Direction { kBothDirections, kForwardOnly, kReverseOnly };
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Relay constructor given a channel.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This code initializes the relay and reserves all resources that need to be
|
||||
* locked. Initially the relay is set to both lines at 0v.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param channel The channel number (0-3).
|
||||
* @param direction The direction that the Relay object will control.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit Relay(int channel, Direction direction = kBothDirections);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Free the resource associated with a relay.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The relay channels are set to free and the relay output is turned off.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
~Relay() override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the relay state.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Valid values depend on which directions of the relay are controlled by the
|
||||
* object.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* When set to kBothDirections, the relay can be any of the four states:
|
||||
* 0v-0v, 0v-12v, 12v-0v, 12v-12v
|
||||
*
|
||||
* When set to kForwardOnly or kReverseOnly, you can specify the constant for
|
||||
* the direction or you can simply specify kOff and kOn. Using only kOff and
|
||||
* kOn is recommended.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param value The state to set the relay.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Set(Value value);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the Relay State
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Gets the current state of the relay.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* When set to kForwardOnly or kReverseOnly, value is returned as kOn/kOff not
|
||||
* kForward/kReverse (per the recommendation in Set).
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The current state of the relay as a Relay::Value
|
||||
*/
|
||||
Value Get() const;
|
||||
|
||||
int GetChannel() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the expiration time for the Relay object.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param timeout The timeout (in seconds) for this relay object
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetExpiration(double timeout) override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Return the expiration time for the relay object.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The expiration time value.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetExpiration() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Check if the relay object is currently alive or stopped due to a timeout.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return a bool value that is true if the motor has NOT timed out and should
|
||||
* still be running.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsAlive() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Stop the motor associated with this PWM object.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This is called by the MotorSafetyHelper object when it has a timeout for
|
||||
* this relay and needs to stop it from running.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void StopMotor() override;
|
||||
bool IsSafetyEnabled() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Enable/disable motor safety for this device.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Turn on and off the motor safety option for this relay object.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param enabled True if motor safety is enforced for this object
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetSafetyEnabled(bool enabled) override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Check if motor safety is enabled for this object.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @returns True if motor safety is enforced for this object
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsSafetyEnabled() const override;
|
||||
|
||||
void GetDescription(wpi::raw_ostream& desc) const override;
|
||||
|
||||
void InitSendable(SendableBuilder& builder) override;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -36,11 +36,53 @@ class Resource : public ErrorBase {
|
||||
Resource(const Resource&) = delete;
|
||||
Resource& operator=(const Resource&) = delete;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Factory method to create a Resource allocation-tracker *if* needed.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param r address of the caller's Resource pointer. If *r == nullptr,
|
||||
* this will construct a Resource and make *r point to it. If
|
||||
* *r != nullptr, i.e. the caller already has a Resource
|
||||
* instance, this won't do anything.
|
||||
* @param elements the number of elements for this Resource allocator to
|
||||
* track, that is, it will allocate resource numbers in the
|
||||
* range [0 .. elements - 1].
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void CreateResourceObject(std::unique_ptr<Resource>& r,
|
||||
uint32_t elements);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Allocate storage for a new instance of Resource.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Allocate a bool array of values that will get initialized to indicate that
|
||||
* no resources have been allocated yet. The indicies of the resources are
|
||||
* [0 .. elements - 1].
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit Resource(uint32_t size);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Allocate a resource.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* When a resource is requested, mark it allocated. In this case, a free
|
||||
* resource value within the range is located and returned after it is marked
|
||||
* allocated.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
uint32_t Allocate(const std::string& resourceDesc);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Allocate a specific resource value.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The user requests a specific resource value, i.e. channel number and it is
|
||||
* verified unallocated, then returned.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
uint32_t Allocate(uint32_t index, const std::string& resourceDesc);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Free an allocated resource.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* After a resource is no longer needed, for example a destructor is called
|
||||
* for a channel assignment class, Free will release the resource value so it
|
||||
* can be reused somewhere else in the program.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Free(uint32_t index);
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -52,13 +52,57 @@ int StartRobot() {
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class RobotBase {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Determine if the Robot is currently enabled.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return True if the Robot is currently enabled by the field controls.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsEnabled() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Determine if the Robot is currently disabled.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return True if the Robot is currently disabled by the field controls.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsDisabled() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Determine if the robot is currently in Autonomous mode.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return True if the robot is currently operating Autonomously as determined
|
||||
* by the field controls.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsAutonomous() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Determine if the robot is currently in Operator Control mode.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return True if the robot is currently operating in Tele-Op mode as
|
||||
* determined by the field controls.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsOperatorControl() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Determine if the robot is currently in Test mode.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return True if the robot is currently running tests as determined by the
|
||||
* field controls.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsTest() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Indicates if new data is available from the driver station.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Has new data arrived over the network since the last time this
|
||||
* function was called?
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsNewDataAvailable() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Gets the ID of the main robot thread.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static std::thread::id GetThreadId();
|
||||
|
||||
virtual void StartCompetition() = 0;
|
||||
|
||||
static constexpr bool IsReal() {
|
||||
@@ -72,7 +116,19 @@ class RobotBase {
|
||||
static constexpr bool IsSimulation() { return !IsReal(); }
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Constructor for a generic robot program.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* User code should be placed in the constructor that runs before the
|
||||
* Autonomous or Operator Control period starts. The constructor will run to
|
||||
* completion before Autonomous is entered.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This must be used to ensure that the communications code starts. In the
|
||||
* future it would be nice to put this code into it's own task that loads on
|
||||
* boot so ensure that it runs.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
RobotBase();
|
||||
|
||||
virtual ~RobotBase() = default;
|
||||
|
||||
RobotBase(const RobotBase&) = delete;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -22,26 +22,167 @@ struct CANStatus {
|
||||
class RobotController {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
RobotController() = delete;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Return the FPGA Version number.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* For now, expect this to be competition year.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return FPGA Version number.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static int GetFPGAVersion();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Return the FPGA Revision number.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The format of the revision is 3 numbers. The 12 most significant bits are
|
||||
* the Major Revision. The next 8 bits are the Minor Revision. The 12 least
|
||||
* significant bits are the Build Number.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return FPGA Revision number.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static int64_t GetFPGARevision();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Read the microsecond-resolution timer on the FPGA.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The current time in microseconds according to the FPGA (since FPGA
|
||||
* reset).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static uint64_t GetFPGATime();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the state of the "USER" button on the roboRIO.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return True if the button is currently pressed down
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static bool GetUserButton();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Check if the FPGA outputs are enabled.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The outputs may be disabled if the robot is disabled or e-stopped, the
|
||||
* watchdog has expired, or if the roboRIO browns out.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return True if the FPGA outputs are enabled.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static bool IsSysActive();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Check if the system is browned out.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return True if the system is browned out
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static bool IsBrownedOut();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the input voltage to the robot controller.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The controller input voltage value in Volts
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static double GetInputVoltage();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the input current to the robot controller.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The controller input current value in Amps
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static double GetInputCurrent();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the voltage of the 3.3V rail.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The controller 3.3V rail voltage value in Volts
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static double GetVoltage3V3();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the current output of the 3.3V rail.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The controller 3.3V rail output current value in Amps
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static double GetCurrent3V3();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the enabled state of the 3.3V rail. The rail may be disabled due to a
|
||||
* controller brownout, a short circuit on the rail, or controller
|
||||
* over-voltage.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The controller 3.3V rail enabled value. True for enabled.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static bool GetEnabled3V3();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the count of the total current faults on the 3.3V rail since the
|
||||
* controller has booted.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The number of faults
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static int GetFaultCount3V3();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the voltage of the 5V rail.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The controller 5V rail voltage value in Volts
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static double GetVoltage5V();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the current output of the 5V rail.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The controller 5V rail output current value in Amps
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static double GetCurrent5V();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the enabled state of the 5V rail. The rail may be disabled due to a
|
||||
* controller brownout, a short circuit on the rail, or controller
|
||||
* over-voltage.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The controller 5V rail enabled value. True for enabled.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static bool GetEnabled5V();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the count of the total current faults on the 5V rail since the
|
||||
* controller has booted.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The number of faults
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static int GetFaultCount5V();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the voltage of the 6V rail.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The controller 6V rail voltage value in Volts
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static double GetVoltage6V();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the current output of the 6V rail.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The controller 6V rail output current value in Amps
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static double GetCurrent6V();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the enabled state of the 6V rail. The rail may be disabled due to a
|
||||
* controller brownout, a short circuit on the rail, or controller
|
||||
* over-voltage.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The controller 6V rail enabled value. True for enabled.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static bool GetEnabled6V();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the count of the total current faults on the 6V rail since the
|
||||
* controller has booted.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The number of faults.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static int GetFaultCount6V();
|
||||
|
||||
static CANStatus GetCANStatus();
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
} // namespace frc
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -41,62 +41,364 @@ class RobotDrive : public MotorSafety, public ErrorBase {
|
||||
kRearRightMotor = 3
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Constructor for RobotDrive with 2 motors specified with channel numbers.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Set up parameters for a two wheel drive system where the
|
||||
* left and right motor pwm channels are specified in the call.
|
||||
* This call assumes Talons for controlling the motors.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param leftMotorChannel The PWM channel number that drives the left motor.
|
||||
* 0-9 are on-board, 10-19 are on the MXP port
|
||||
* @param rightMotorChannel The PWM channel number that drives the right
|
||||
* motor. 0-9 are on-board, 10-19 are on the MXP port
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("Use DifferentialDrive or MecanumDrive classes instead.")
|
||||
RobotDrive(int leftMotorChannel, int rightMotorChannel);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Constructor for RobotDrive with 4 motors specified with channel numbers.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Set up parameters for a four wheel drive system where all four motor
|
||||
* pwm channels are specified in the call.
|
||||
* This call assumes Talons for controlling the motors.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param frontLeftMotor Front left motor channel number. 0-9 are on-board,
|
||||
* 10-19 are on the MXP port
|
||||
* @param rearLeftMotor Rear Left motor channel number. 0-9 are on-board,
|
||||
* 10-19 are on the MXP port
|
||||
* @param frontRightMotor Front right motor channel number. 0-9 are on-board,
|
||||
* 10-19 are on the MXP port
|
||||
* @param rearRightMotor Rear Right motor channel number. 0-9 are on-board,
|
||||
* 10-19 are on the MXP port
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("Use DifferentialDrive or MecanumDrive classes instead.")
|
||||
RobotDrive(int frontLeftMotorChannel, int rearLeftMotorChannel,
|
||||
int frontRightMotorChannel, int rearRightMotorChannel);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Constructor for RobotDrive with 2 motors specified as SpeedController
|
||||
* objects.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The SpeedController version of the constructor enables programs to use the
|
||||
* RobotDrive classes with subclasses of the SpeedController objects, for
|
||||
* example, versions with ramping or reshaping of the curve to suit motor bias
|
||||
* or deadband elimination.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param leftMotor The left SpeedController object used to drive the robot.
|
||||
* @param rightMotor The right SpeedController object used to drive the robot.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("Use DifferentialDrive or MecanumDrive classes instead.")
|
||||
RobotDrive(SpeedController* leftMotor, SpeedController* rightMotor);
|
||||
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("Use DifferentialDrive or MecanumDrive classes instead.")
|
||||
RobotDrive(SpeedController& leftMotor, SpeedController& rightMotor);
|
||||
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("Use DifferentialDrive or MecanumDrive classes instead.")
|
||||
RobotDrive(std::shared_ptr<SpeedController> leftMotor,
|
||||
std::shared_ptr<SpeedController> rightMotor);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Constructor for RobotDrive with 4 motors specified as SpeedController
|
||||
* objects.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Speed controller input version of RobotDrive (see previous comments).
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param frontLeftMotor The front left SpeedController object used to drive
|
||||
* the robot.
|
||||
* @param rearLeftMotor The back left SpeedController object used to drive
|
||||
* the robot.
|
||||
* @param frontRightMotor The front right SpeedController object used to drive
|
||||
* the robot.
|
||||
* @param rearRightMotor The back right SpeedController object used to drive
|
||||
* the robot.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("Use DifferentialDrive or MecanumDrive classes instead.")
|
||||
RobotDrive(SpeedController* frontLeftMotor, SpeedController* rearLeftMotor,
|
||||
SpeedController* frontRightMotor, SpeedController* rearRightMotor);
|
||||
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("Use DifferentialDrive or MecanumDrive classes instead.")
|
||||
RobotDrive(SpeedController& frontLeftMotor, SpeedController& rearLeftMotor,
|
||||
SpeedController& frontRightMotor, SpeedController& rearRightMotor);
|
||||
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("Use DifferentialDrive or MecanumDrive classes instead.")
|
||||
RobotDrive(std::shared_ptr<SpeedController> frontLeftMotor,
|
||||
std::shared_ptr<SpeedController> rearLeftMotor,
|
||||
std::shared_ptr<SpeedController> frontRightMotor,
|
||||
std::shared_ptr<SpeedController> rearRightMotor);
|
||||
|
||||
virtual ~RobotDrive() = default;
|
||||
|
||||
RobotDrive(const RobotDrive&) = delete;
|
||||
RobotDrive& operator=(const RobotDrive&) = delete;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Drive the motors at "outputMagnitude" and "curve".
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Both outputMagnitude and curve are -1.0 to +1.0 values, where 0.0
|
||||
* represents stopped and not turning. curve < 0 will turn left and curve > 0
|
||||
* will turn right.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The algorithm for steering provides a constant turn radius for any normal
|
||||
* speed range, both forward and backward. Increasing m_sensitivity causes
|
||||
* sharper turns for fixed values of curve.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This function will most likely be used in an autonomous routine.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param outputMagnitude The speed setting for the outside wheel in a turn,
|
||||
* forward or backwards, +1 to -1.
|
||||
* @param curve The rate of turn, constant for different forward
|
||||
* speeds. Set curve < 0 for left turn or curve > 0 for
|
||||
* right turn.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Set curve = e^(-r/w) to get a turn radius r for wheelbase w of your robot.
|
||||
* Conversely, turn radius r = -ln(curve)*w for a given value of curve and
|
||||
* wheelbase w.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Drive(double outputMagnitude, double curve);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Provide tank steering using the stored robot configuration.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Drive the robot using two joystick inputs. The Y-axis will be selected from
|
||||
* each Joystick object.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param leftStick The joystick to control the left side of the robot.
|
||||
* @param rightStick The joystick to control the right side of the robot.
|
||||
* @param squaredInputs If true, the sensitivity will be decreased for small
|
||||
* values
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void TankDrive(GenericHID* leftStick, GenericHID* rightStick,
|
||||
bool squaredInputs = true);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Provide tank steering using the stored robot configuration.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Drive the robot using two joystick inputs. The Y-axis will be selected from
|
||||
* each Joystick object.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param leftStick The joystick to control the left side of the robot.
|
||||
* @param rightStick The joystick to control the right side of the robot.
|
||||
* @param squaredInputs If true, the sensitivity will be decreased for small
|
||||
* values
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void TankDrive(GenericHID& leftStick, GenericHID& rightStick,
|
||||
bool squaredInputs = true);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Provide tank steering using the stored robot configuration.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This function lets you pick the axis to be used on each Joystick object for
|
||||
* the left and right sides of the robot.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param leftStick The Joystick object to use for the left side of the
|
||||
* robot.
|
||||
* @param leftAxis The axis to select on the left side Joystick object.
|
||||
* @param rightStick The Joystick object to use for the right side of the
|
||||
* robot.
|
||||
* @param rightAxis The axis to select on the right side Joystick object.
|
||||
* @param squaredInputs If true, the sensitivity will be decreased for small
|
||||
* values
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void TankDrive(GenericHID* leftStick, int leftAxis, GenericHID* rightStick,
|
||||
int rightAxis, bool squaredInputs = true);
|
||||
|
||||
void TankDrive(GenericHID& leftStick, int leftAxis, GenericHID& rightStick,
|
||||
int rightAxis, bool squaredInputs = true);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Provide tank steering using the stored robot configuration.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This function lets you directly provide joystick values from any source.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param leftValue The value of the left stick.
|
||||
* @param rightValue The value of the right stick.
|
||||
* @param squaredInputs If true, the sensitivity will be decreased for small
|
||||
* values
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void TankDrive(double leftValue, double rightValue,
|
||||
bool squaredInputs = true);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Arcade drive implements single stick driving.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Given a single Joystick, the class assumes the Y axis for the move value
|
||||
* and the X axis for the rotate value. (Should add more information here
|
||||
* regarding the way that arcade drive works.)
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param stick The joystick to use for Arcade single-stick driving.
|
||||
* The Y-axis will be selected for forwards/backwards and
|
||||
* the X-axis will be selected for rotation rate.
|
||||
* @param squaredInputs If true, the sensitivity will be decreased for small
|
||||
* values
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void ArcadeDrive(GenericHID* stick, bool squaredInputs = true);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Arcade drive implements single stick driving.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Given a single Joystick, the class assumes the Y axis for the move value
|
||||
* and the X axis for the rotate value. (Should add more information here
|
||||
* regarding the way that arcade drive works.)
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param stick The joystick to use for Arcade single-stick driving.
|
||||
* The Y-axis will be selected for forwards/backwards and
|
||||
* the X-axis will be selected for rotation rate.
|
||||
* @param squaredInputs If true, the sensitivity will be decreased for small
|
||||
* values
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void ArcadeDrive(GenericHID& stick, bool squaredInputs = true);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Arcade drive implements single stick driving.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Given two joystick instances and two axis, compute the values to send to
|
||||
* either two or four motors.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param moveStick The Joystick object that represents the
|
||||
* forward/backward direction
|
||||
* @param moveAxis The axis on the moveStick object to use for
|
||||
* forwards/backwards (typically Y_AXIS)
|
||||
* @param rotateStick The Joystick object that represents the rotation value
|
||||
* @param rotateAxis The axis on the rotation object to use for the rotate
|
||||
* right/left (typically X_AXIS)
|
||||
* @param squaredInputs Setting this parameter to true increases the
|
||||
* sensitivity at lower speeds
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void ArcadeDrive(GenericHID* moveStick, int moveChannel,
|
||||
GenericHID* rotateStick, int rotateChannel,
|
||||
bool squaredInputs = true);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Arcade drive implements single stick driving.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Given two joystick instances and two axis, compute the values to send to
|
||||
* either two or four motors.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param moveStick The Joystick object that represents the
|
||||
* forward/backward direction
|
||||
* @param moveAxis The axis on the moveStick object to use for
|
||||
* forwards/backwards (typically Y_AXIS)
|
||||
* @param rotateStick The Joystick object that represents the rotation value
|
||||
* @param rotateAxis The axis on the rotation object to use for the rotate
|
||||
* right/left (typically X_AXIS)
|
||||
* @param squaredInputs Setting this parameter to true increases the
|
||||
* sensitivity at lower speeds
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void ArcadeDrive(GenericHID& moveStick, int moveChannel,
|
||||
GenericHID& rotateStick, int rotateChannel,
|
||||
bool squaredInputs = true);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Arcade drive implements single stick driving.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This function lets you directly provide joystick values from any source.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param moveValue The value to use for fowards/backwards
|
||||
* @param rotateValue The value to use for the rotate right/left
|
||||
* @param squaredInputs If set, increases the sensitivity at low speeds
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void ArcadeDrive(double moveValue, double rotateValue,
|
||||
bool squaredInputs = true);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Drive method for Mecanum wheeled robots.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* A method for driving with Mecanum wheeled robots. There are 4 wheels
|
||||
* on the robot, arranged so that the front and back wheels are toed in 45
|
||||
* degrees.
|
||||
* When looking at the wheels from the top, the roller axles should form an X
|
||||
* across the robot.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This is designed to be directly driven by joystick axes.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param x The speed that the robot should drive in the X direction.
|
||||
* [-1.0..1.0]
|
||||
* @param y The speed that the robot should drive in the Y direction.
|
||||
* This input is inverted to match the forward == -1.0 that
|
||||
* joysticks produce. [-1.0..1.0]
|
||||
* @param rotation The rate of rotation for the robot that is completely
|
||||
* independent of the translation. [-1.0..1.0]
|
||||
* @param gyroAngle The current angle reading from the gyro. Use this to
|
||||
* implement field-oriented controls.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void MecanumDrive_Cartesian(double x, double y, double rotation,
|
||||
double gyroAngle = 0.0);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Drive method for Mecanum wheeled robots.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* A method for driving with Mecanum wheeled robots. There are 4 wheels
|
||||
* on the robot, arranged so that the front and back wheels are toed in 45
|
||||
* degrees.
|
||||
* When looking at the wheels from the top, the roller axles should form an X
|
||||
* across the robot.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param magnitude The speed that the robot should drive in a given
|
||||
* direction. [-1.0..1.0]
|
||||
* @param direction The direction the robot should drive in degrees. The
|
||||
* direction and maginitute are independent of the rotation
|
||||
* rate.
|
||||
* @param rotation The rate of rotation for the robot that is completely
|
||||
* independent of the magnitute or direction. [-1.0..1.0]
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void MecanumDrive_Polar(double magnitude, double direction, double rotation);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Holonomic Drive method for Mecanum wheeled robots.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This is an alias to MecanumDrive_Polar() for backward compatability
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param magnitude The speed that the robot should drive in a given
|
||||
* direction. [-1.0..1.0]
|
||||
* @param direction The direction the robot should drive. The direction and
|
||||
* magnitude are independent of the rotation rate.
|
||||
* @param rotation The rate of rotation for the robot that is completely
|
||||
* independent of the magnitude or direction. [-1.0..1.0]
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void HolonomicDrive(double magnitude, double direction, double rotation);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the speed of the right and left motors.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This is used once an appropriate drive setup function is called such as
|
||||
* TwoWheelDrive(). The motors are set to "leftOutput" and "rightOutput"
|
||||
* and includes flipping the direction of one side for opposing motors.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param leftOutput The speed to send to the left side of the robot.
|
||||
* @param rightOutput The speed to send to the right side of the robot.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void SetLeftRightMotorOutputs(double leftOutput, double rightOutput);
|
||||
|
||||
/*
|
||||
* Invert a motor direction.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This is used when a motor should run in the opposite direction as the drive
|
||||
* code would normally run it. Motors that are direct drive would be inverted,
|
||||
* the Drive code assumes that the motors are geared with one reversal.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param motor The motor index to invert.
|
||||
* @param isInverted True if the motor should be inverted when operated.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetInvertedMotor(MotorType motor, bool isInverted);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the turning sensitivity.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This only impacts the Drive() entry-point.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param sensitivity Effectively sets the turning sensitivity (or turn radius
|
||||
* for a given value)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetSensitivity(double sensitivity);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Configure the scaling factor for using RobotDrive with motor controllers in
|
||||
* a mode other than PercentVbus.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param maxOutput Multiplied with the output percentage computed by the
|
||||
* drive functions.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetMaxOutput(double maxOutput);
|
||||
|
||||
void SetExpiration(double timeout) override;
|
||||
@@ -108,9 +410,29 @@ class RobotDrive : public MotorSafety, public ErrorBase {
|
||||
void GetDescription(wpi::raw_ostream& desc) const override;
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Common function to initialize all the robot drive constructors.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Create a motor safety object (the real reason for the common code) and
|
||||
* initialize all the motor assignments. The default timeout is set for the
|
||||
* robot drive.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void InitRobotDrive();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Limit motor values to the -1.0 to +1.0 range.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double Limit(double number);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Normalize all wheel speeds if the magnitude of any wheel is greater than
|
||||
* 1.0.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Normalize(double* wheelSpeeds);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Rotate a vector in Cartesian space.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void RotateVector(double& x, double& y, double angle);
|
||||
|
||||
static constexpr int kMaxNumberOfMotors = 4;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -16,6 +16,12 @@ namespace frc {
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class SD540 : public PWMSpeedController {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Constructor for a SD540.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param channel The PWM channel that the SD540 is attached to. 0-9 are
|
||||
* on-board, 10-19 are on the MXP port
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit SD540(int channel);
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -33,56 +33,285 @@ class SPI : public ErrorBase {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
enum Port { kOnboardCS0 = 0, kOnboardCS1, kOnboardCS2, kOnboardCS3, kMXP };
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Constructor
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param port the physical SPI port
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit SPI(Port port);
|
||||
|
||||
~SPI() override;
|
||||
|
||||
SPI(const SPI&) = delete;
|
||||
SPI& operator=(const SPI&) = delete;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Configure the rate of the generated clock signal.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The default value is 500,000Hz.
|
||||
* The maximum value is 4,000,000Hz.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param hz The clock rate in Hertz.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetClockRate(double hz);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Configure the order that bits are sent and received on the wire
|
||||
* to be most significant bit first.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetMSBFirst();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Configure the order that bits are sent and received on the wire
|
||||
* to be least significant bit first.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetLSBFirst();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Configure that the data is stable on the leading edge and the data
|
||||
* changes on the trailing edge.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetSampleDataOnLeadingEdge();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Configure that the data is stable on the trailing edge and the data
|
||||
* changes on the leading edge.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetSampleDataOnTrailingEdge();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Configure that the data is stable on the falling edge and the data
|
||||
* changes on the rising edge.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("Use SetSampleDataOnTrailingEdge in most cases.")
|
||||
void SetSampleDataOnFalling();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Configure that the data is stable on the rising edge and the data
|
||||
* changes on the falling edge.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("Use SetSampleDataOnLeadingEdge in most cases")
|
||||
void SetSampleDataOnRising();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Configure the clock output line to be active low.
|
||||
* This is sometimes called clock polarity high or clock idle high.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetClockActiveLow();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Configure the clock output line to be active high.
|
||||
* This is sometimes called clock polarity low or clock idle low.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetClockActiveHigh();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Configure the chip select line to be active high.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetChipSelectActiveHigh();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Configure the chip select line to be active low.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetChipSelectActiveLow();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Write data to the slave device. Blocks until there is space in the
|
||||
* output FIFO.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* If not running in output only mode, also saves the data received
|
||||
* on the MISO input during the transfer into the receive FIFO.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual int Write(uint8_t* data, int size);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Read a word from the receive FIFO.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Waits for the current transfer to complete if the receive FIFO is empty.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* If the receive FIFO is empty, there is no active transfer, and initiate
|
||||
* is false, errors.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param initiate If true, this function pushes "0" into the transmit buffer
|
||||
* and initiates a transfer. If false, this function assumes
|
||||
* that data is already in the receive FIFO from a previous
|
||||
* write.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual int Read(bool initiate, uint8_t* dataReceived, int size);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Perform a simultaneous read/write transaction with the device
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param dataToSend The data to be written out to the device
|
||||
* @param dataReceived Buffer to receive data from the device
|
||||
* @param size The length of the transaction, in bytes
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual int Transaction(uint8_t* dataToSend, uint8_t* dataReceived, int size);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Initialize automatic SPI transfer engine.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Only a single engine is available, and use of it blocks use of all other
|
||||
* chip select usage on the same physical SPI port while it is running.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param bufferSize buffer size in bytes
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void InitAuto(int bufferSize);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Frees the automatic SPI transfer engine.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void FreeAuto();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the data to be transmitted by the engine.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Up to 16 bytes are configurable, and may be followed by up to 127 zero
|
||||
* bytes.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param dataToSend data to send (maximum 16 bytes)
|
||||
* @param zeroSize number of zeros to send after the data
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetAutoTransmitData(wpi::ArrayRef<uint8_t> dataToSend, int zeroSize);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Start running the automatic SPI transfer engine at a periodic rate.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* InitAuto() and SetAutoTransmitData() must be called before calling this
|
||||
* function.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param period period between transfers, in seconds (us resolution)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void StartAutoRate(double period);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Start running the automatic SPI transfer engine when a trigger occurs.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* InitAuto() and SetAutoTransmitData() must be called before calling this
|
||||
* function.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param source digital source for the trigger (may be an analog trigger)
|
||||
* @param rising trigger on the rising edge
|
||||
* @param falling trigger on the falling edge
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void StartAutoTrigger(DigitalSource& source, bool rising, bool falling);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Stop running the automatic SPI transfer engine.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void StopAuto();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Force the engine to make a single transfer.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void ForceAutoRead();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Read data that has been transferred by the automatic SPI transfer engine.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Transfers may be made a byte at a time, so it's necessary for the caller
|
||||
* to handle cases where an entire transfer has not been completed.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Blocks until numToRead bytes have been read or timeout expires.
|
||||
* May be called with numToRead=0 to retrieve how many bytes are available.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param buffer buffer where read bytes are stored
|
||||
* @param numToRead number of bytes to read
|
||||
* @param timeout timeout in seconds (ms resolution)
|
||||
* @return Number of bytes remaining to be read
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int ReadAutoReceivedData(uint8_t* buffer, int numToRead, double timeout);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the number of bytes dropped by the automatic SPI transfer engine due
|
||||
* to the receive buffer being full.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Number of bytes dropped
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetAutoDroppedCount();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Initialize the accumulator.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param period Time between reads
|
||||
* @param cmd SPI command to send to request data
|
||||
* @param xferSize SPI transfer size, in bytes
|
||||
* @param validMask Mask to apply to received data for validity checking
|
||||
* @param validData After valid_mask is applied, required matching value for
|
||||
* validity checking
|
||||
* @param dataShift Bit shift to apply to received data to get actual data
|
||||
* value
|
||||
* @param dataSize Size (in bits) of data field
|
||||
* @param isSigned Is data field signed?
|
||||
* @param bigEndian Is device big endian?
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void InitAccumulator(double period, int cmd, int xferSize, int validMask,
|
||||
int validValue, int dataShift, int dataSize,
|
||||
bool isSigned, bool bigEndian);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Frees the accumulator.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void FreeAccumulator();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Resets the accumulator to zero.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void ResetAccumulator();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the center value of the accumulator.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The center value is subtracted from each value before it is added to the
|
||||
* accumulator. This is used for the center value of devices like gyros and
|
||||
* accelerometers to make integration work and to take the device offset into
|
||||
* account when integrating.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetAccumulatorCenter(int center);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the accumulator's deadband.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetAccumulatorDeadband(int deadband);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Read the last value read by the accumulator engine.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetAccumulatorLastValue() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Read the accumulated value.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The 64-bit value accumulated since the last Reset().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int64_t GetAccumulatorValue() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Read the number of accumulated values.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Read the count of the accumulated values since the accumulator was last
|
||||
* Reset().
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The number of times samples from the channel were accumulated.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int64_t GetAccumulatorCount() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Read the average of the accumulated value.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The accumulated average value (value / count).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetAccumulatorAverage() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Read the accumulated value and the number of accumulated values atomically.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This function reads the value and count atomically.
|
||||
* This can be used for averaging.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param value Pointer to the 64-bit accumulated output.
|
||||
* @param count Pointer to the number of accumulation cycles.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetAccumulatorOutput(int64_t& value, int64_t& count) const;
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -27,17 +27,72 @@ namespace frc {
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class SafePWM : public PWM, public MotorSafety {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Constructor for a SafePWM object taking a channel number.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param channel The PWM channel number 0-9 are on-board, 10-19 are on the
|
||||
* MXP port
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit SafePWM(int channel);
|
||||
|
||||
virtual ~SafePWM() = default;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the expiration time for the PWM object.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param timeout The timeout (in seconds) for this motor object
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetExpiration(double timeout);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Return the expiration time for the PWM object.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @returns The expiration time value.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetExpiration() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Check if the PWM object is currently alive or stopped due to a timeout.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return a bool value that is true if the motor has NOT timed out and should
|
||||
* still be running.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsAlive() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Stop the motor associated with this PWM object.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This is called by the MotorSafetyHelper object when it has a timeout for
|
||||
* this PWM and needs to stop it from running.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void StopMotor();
|
||||
bool IsSafetyEnabled() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Enable/disable motor safety for this device.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Turn on and off the motor safety option for this PWM object.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param enabled True if motor safety is enforced for this object
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetSafetyEnabled(bool enabled);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Check if motor safety is enabled for this object.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @returns True if motor safety is enforced for this object
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsSafetyEnabled() const;
|
||||
|
||||
void GetDescription(wpi::raw_ostream& desc) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Feed the MotorSafety timer when setting the speed.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This method is called by the subclass motor whenever it updates its speed,
|
||||
* thereby reseting the timeout value.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param speed Value to pass to the PWM class
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void SetSpeed(double speed);
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -19,13 +19,79 @@ class WPI_DEPRECATED(
|
||||
"code will be much more difficult under this system. Use TimedRobot or "
|
||||
"Command-Based instead.") SampleRobot : public RobotBase {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Start a competition.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This code needs to track the order of the field starting to ensure that
|
||||
* everything happens in the right order. Repeatedly run the correct method,
|
||||
* either Autonomous or OperatorControl or Test when the robot is enabled.
|
||||
* After running the correct method, wait for some state to change, either the
|
||||
* other mode starts or the robot is disabled. Then go back and wait for the
|
||||
* robot to be enabled again.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void StartCompetition() override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Robot-wide initialization code should go here.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Users should override this method for default Robot-wide initialization
|
||||
* which will be called when the robot is first powered on. It will be called
|
||||
* exactly one time.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Warning: the Driver Station "Robot Code" light and FMS "Robot Ready"
|
||||
* indicators will be off until RobotInit() exits. Code in RobotInit() that
|
||||
* waits for enable will cause the robot to never indicate that the code is
|
||||
* ready, causing the robot to be bypassed in a match.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void RobotInit();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Disabled should go here.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Programmers should override this method to run code that should run while
|
||||
* the field is disabled.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void Disabled();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Autonomous should go here.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Programmers should override this method to run code that should run while
|
||||
* the field is in the autonomous period. This will be called once each time
|
||||
* the robot enters the autonomous state.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void Autonomous();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Operator control (tele-operated) code should go here.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Programmers should override this method to run code that should run while
|
||||
* the field is in the Operator Control (tele-operated) period. This is called
|
||||
* once each time the robot enters the teleop state.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void OperatorControl();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Test program should go here.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Programmers should override this method to run code that executes while the
|
||||
* robot is in test mode. This will be called once whenever the robot enters
|
||||
* test mode
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void Test();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Robot main program for free-form programs.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This should be overridden by user subclasses if the intent is to not use
|
||||
* the Autonomous() and OperatorControl() methods. In that case, the program
|
||||
* is responsible for sensing when to run the autonomous and operator control
|
||||
* functions in their program.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This method will be called immediately after the constructor is called. If
|
||||
* it has not been overridden by a user subclass (i.e. the default version
|
||||
* runs), then the Autonomous() and OperatorControl() methods will be called.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void RobotMain();
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -15,15 +15,77 @@ namespace frc {
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class SensorUtil final {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
static int GetDefaultSolenoidModule() { return 0; }
|
||||
static int GetDefaultSolenoidModule();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Check that the solenoid module number is valid.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Solenoid module is valid and present
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static bool CheckSolenoidModule(int moduleNumber);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Check that the digital channel number is valid.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Verify that the channel number is one of the legal channel numbers. Channel
|
||||
* numbers are 1-based.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Digital channel is valid
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static bool CheckDigitalChannel(int channel);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Check that the relay channel number is valid.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Verify that the channel number is one of the legal channel numbers. Channel
|
||||
* numbers are 0-based.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Relay channel is valid
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static bool CheckRelayChannel(int channel);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Check that the digital channel number is valid.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Verify that the channel number is one of the legal channel numbers. Channel
|
||||
* numbers are 1-based.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return PWM channel is valid
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static bool CheckPWMChannel(int channel);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Check that the analog input number is value.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Verify that the analog input number is one of the legal channel numbers.
|
||||
* Channel numbers are 0-based.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Analog channel is valid
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static bool CheckAnalogInputChannel(int channel);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Check that the analog output number is valid.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Verify that the analog output number is one of the legal channel numbers.
|
||||
* Channel numbers are 0-based.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Analog channel is valid
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static bool CheckAnalogOutputChannel(int channel);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Verify that the solenoid channel number is within limits.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Solenoid channel is valid
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static bool CheckSolenoidChannel(int channel);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Verify that the power distribution channel number is within limits.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return PDP channel is valid
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static bool CheckPDPChannel(int channel);
|
||||
|
||||
static const int kDigitalChannels;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -56,29 +56,161 @@ class SerialPort : public ErrorBase {
|
||||
|
||||
enum Port { kOnboard = 0, kMXP = 1, kUSB = 2, kUSB1 = 2, kUSB2 = 3 };
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Create an instance of a Serial Port class.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param baudRate The baud rate to configure the serial port.
|
||||
* @param port The physical port to use
|
||||
* @param dataBits The number of data bits per transfer. Valid values are
|
||||
* between 5 and 8 bits.
|
||||
* @param parity Select the type of parity checking to use.
|
||||
* @param stopBits The number of stop bits to use as defined by the enum
|
||||
* StopBits.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
SerialPort(int baudRate, Port port = kOnboard, int dataBits = 8,
|
||||
Parity parity = kParity_None, StopBits stopBits = kStopBits_One);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Create an instance of a Serial Port class.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param baudRate The baud rate to configure the serial port.
|
||||
* @param port The physical port to use
|
||||
* @param portName The direct port name to use
|
||||
* @param dataBits The number of data bits per transfer. Valid values are
|
||||
* between 5 and 8 bits.
|
||||
* @param parity Select the type of parity checking to use.
|
||||
* @param stopBits The number of stop bits to use as defined by the enum
|
||||
* StopBits.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("Will be removed for 2019")
|
||||
SerialPort(int baudRate, const wpi::Twine& portName, Port port = kOnboard,
|
||||
int dataBits = 8, Parity parity = kParity_None,
|
||||
StopBits stopBits = kStopBits_One);
|
||||
|
||||
~SerialPort();
|
||||
|
||||
SerialPort(const SerialPort&) = delete;
|
||||
SerialPort& operator=(const SerialPort&) = delete;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the type of flow control to enable on this port.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* By default, flow control is disabled.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetFlowControl(FlowControl flowControl);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Enable termination and specify the termination character.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Termination is currently only implemented for receive.
|
||||
* When the the terminator is recieved, the Read() or Scanf() will return
|
||||
* fewer bytes than requested, stopping after the terminator.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param terminator The character to use for termination.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void EnableTermination(char terminator = '\n');
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Disable termination behavior.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void DisableTermination();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the number of bytes currently available to read from the serial port.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The number of bytes available to read
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetBytesReceived();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Read raw bytes out of the buffer.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param buffer Pointer to the buffer to store the bytes in.
|
||||
* @param count The maximum number of bytes to read.
|
||||
* @return The number of bytes actually read into the buffer.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int Read(char* buffer, int count);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Write raw bytes to the buffer.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param buffer Pointer to the buffer to read the bytes from.
|
||||
* @param count The maximum number of bytes to write.
|
||||
* @return The number of bytes actually written into the port.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int Write(const char* buffer, int count);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Write raw bytes to the buffer.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Use Write({data, len}) to get a buffer that is shorter than the length of
|
||||
* the string.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param buffer StringRef to the buffer to read the bytes from.
|
||||
* @return The number of bytes actually written into the port.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int Write(wpi::StringRef buffer);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Configure the timeout of the serial port.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This defines the timeout for transactions with the hardware.
|
||||
* It will affect reads and very large writes.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param timeout The number of seconds to to wait for I/O.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetTimeout(double timeout);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Specify the size of the input buffer.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Specify the amount of data that can be stored before data
|
||||
* from the device is returned to Read or Scanf. If you want
|
||||
* data that is recieved to be returned immediately, set this to 1.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* It the buffer is not filled before the read timeout expires, all
|
||||
* data that has been received so far will be returned.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param size The read buffer size.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetReadBufferSize(int size);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Specify the size of the output buffer.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Specify the amount of data that can be stored before being
|
||||
* transmitted to the device.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param size The write buffer size.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetWriteBufferSize(int size);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Specify the flushing behavior of the output buffer.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* When set to kFlushOnAccess, data is synchronously written to the serial
|
||||
* port after each call to either Printf() or Write().
|
||||
*
|
||||
* When set to kFlushWhenFull, data will only be written to the serial port
|
||||
* when the buffer is full or when Flush() is called.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param mode The write buffer mode.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetWriteBufferMode(WriteBufferMode mode);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Force the output buffer to be written to the port.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This is used when SetWriteBufferMode() is set to kFlushWhenFull to force a
|
||||
* flush before the buffer is full.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Flush();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Reset the serial port driver to a known state.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Empty the transmit and receive buffers in the device and formatted I/O.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Reset();
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -20,19 +20,83 @@ namespace frc {
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class Servo : public SafePWM {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* @param channel The PWM channel to which the servo is attached. 0-9 are
|
||||
* on-board, 10-19 are on the MXP port
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit Servo(int channel);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the servo position.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Servo values range from 0.0 to 1.0 corresponding to the range of full left
|
||||
* to full right.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param value Position from 0.0 to 1.0.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Set(double value);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the servo to offline.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Set the servo raw value to 0 (undriven)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetOffline();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the servo position.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Servo values range from 0.0 to 1.0 corresponding to the range of full left
|
||||
* to full right.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Position from 0.0 to 1.0.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double Get() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the servo angle.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Assume that the servo angle is linear with respect to the PWM value (big
|
||||
* assumption, need to test).
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Servo angles that are out of the supported range of the servo simply
|
||||
* "saturate" in that direction. In other words, if the servo has a range of
|
||||
* (X degrees to Y degrees) than angles of less than X result in an angle of
|
||||
* X being set and angles of more than Y degrees result in an angle of Y being
|
||||
* set.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param degrees The angle in degrees to set the servo.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetAngle(double angle);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the servo angle.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Assume that the servo angle is linear with respect to the PWM value (big
|
||||
* assumption, need to test).
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The angle in degrees to which the servo is set.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetAngle() const;
|
||||
static double GetMaxAngle() { return kMaxServoAngle; }
|
||||
static double GetMinAngle() { return kMinServoAngle; }
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the maximum angle of the servo.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The maximum angle of the servo in degrees.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetMaxAngle() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the minimum angle of the servo.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The minimum angle of the servo in degrees.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetMinAngle() const;
|
||||
|
||||
void InitSendable(SendableBuilder& builder) override;
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
double GetServoAngleRange() const { return kMaxServoAngle - kMinServoAngle; }
|
||||
double GetServoAngleRange() const;
|
||||
|
||||
static constexpr double kMaxServoAngle = 180.0;
|
||||
static constexpr double kMinServoAngle = 0.0;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -18,7 +18,13 @@ namespace frc {
|
||||
|
||||
class SendableBase : public Sendable {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Creates an instance of the sensor base.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param addLiveWindow if true, add this Sendable to LiveWindow
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit SendableBase(bool addLiveWindow = true);
|
||||
|
||||
~SendableBase() override;
|
||||
|
||||
using Sendable::SetName;
|
||||
@@ -29,10 +35,38 @@ class SendableBase : public Sendable {
|
||||
void SetSubsystem(const wpi::Twine& subsystem) final;
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Add a child component.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param child child component
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void AddChild(std::shared_ptr<Sendable> child);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Add a child component.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param child child component
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void AddChild(void* child);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Sets the name of the sensor with a channel number.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param moduleType A string that defines the module name in the label for
|
||||
* the value
|
||||
* @param channel The channel number the device is plugged into
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetName(const wpi::Twine& moduleType, int channel);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Sets the name of the sensor with a module and channel number.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param moduleType A string that defines the module name in the label for
|
||||
* the value
|
||||
* @param moduleNumber The number of the particular module type
|
||||
* @param channel The channel number the device is plugged into (usually
|
||||
* PWM)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetName(const wpi::Twine& moduleType, int moduleNumber, int channel);
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -24,66 +24,386 @@ class SmartDashboard : public ErrorBase, public SendableBase {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
static void init();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Determines whether the given key is in this table.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param key the key to search for
|
||||
* @return true if the table as a value assigned to the given key
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static bool ContainsKey(wpi::StringRef key);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* @param types bitmask of types; 0 is treated as a "don't care".
|
||||
* @return keys currently in the table
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static std::vector<std::string> GetKeys(int types = 0);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Makes a key's value persistent through program restarts.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param key the key to make persistent
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void SetPersistent(wpi::StringRef key);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Stop making a key's value persistent through program restarts.
|
||||
* The key cannot be null.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param key the key name
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void ClearPersistent(wpi::StringRef key);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns whether the value is persistent through program restarts.
|
||||
* The key cannot be null.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param key the key name
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static bool IsPersistent(wpi::StringRef key);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Sets flags on the specified key in this table. The key can
|
||||
* not be null.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param key the key name
|
||||
* @param flags the flags to set (bitmask)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void SetFlags(wpi::StringRef key, unsigned int flags);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Clears flags on the specified key in this table. The key can
|
||||
* not be null.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param key the key name
|
||||
* @param flags the flags to clear (bitmask)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void ClearFlags(wpi::StringRef key, unsigned int flags);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns the flags for the specified key.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param key the key name
|
||||
* @return the flags, or 0 if the key is not defined
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static unsigned int GetFlags(wpi::StringRef key);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Deletes the specified key in this table.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param key the key name
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void Delete(wpi::StringRef key);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Maps the specified key to the specified value in this table.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The value can be retrieved by calling the get method with a key that is
|
||||
* equal to the original key.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param keyName the key
|
||||
* @param value the value
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void PutData(wpi::StringRef key, Sendable* data);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Maps the specified key (where the key is the name of the Sendable)
|
||||
* to the specified value in this table.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The value can be retrieved by calling the get method with a key that is
|
||||
* equal to the original key.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param value the value
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void PutData(Sendable* value);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns the value at the specified key.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param keyName the key
|
||||
* @return the value
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static Sendable* GetData(wpi::StringRef keyName);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Maps the specified key to the specified value in this table.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The value can be retrieved by calling the get method with a key that is
|
||||
* equal to the original key.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param keyName the key
|
||||
* @param value the value
|
||||
* @return False if the table key already exists with a different type
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static bool PutBoolean(wpi::StringRef keyName, bool value);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Gets the current value in the table, setting it if it does not exist.
|
||||
* @param key the key
|
||||
* @param defaultValue the default value to set if key doesn't exist.
|
||||
* @returns False if the table key exists with a different type
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static bool SetDefaultBoolean(wpi::StringRef key, bool defaultValue);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns the value at the specified key.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* If the key is not found, returns the default value.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param keyName the key
|
||||
* @return the value
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static bool GetBoolean(wpi::StringRef keyName, bool defaultValue);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Maps the specified key to the specified value in this table.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The value can be retrieved by calling the get method with a key that is
|
||||
* equal to the original key.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param keyName the key
|
||||
* @param value the value
|
||||
* @return False if the table key already exists with a different type
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static bool PutNumber(wpi::StringRef keyName, double value);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Gets the current value in the table, setting it if it does not exist.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param key The key.
|
||||
* @param defaultValue The default value to set if key doesn't exist.
|
||||
* @returns False if the table key exists with a different type
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static bool SetDefaultNumber(wpi::StringRef key, double defaultValue);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns the value at the specified key.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* If the key is not found, returns the default value.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param keyName the key
|
||||
* @return the value
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static double GetNumber(wpi::StringRef keyName, double defaultValue);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Maps the specified key to the specified value in this table.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The value can be retrieved by calling the get method with a key that is
|
||||
* equal to the original key.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param keyName the key
|
||||
* @param value the value
|
||||
* @return False if the table key already exists with a different type
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static bool PutString(wpi::StringRef keyName, wpi::StringRef value);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Gets the current value in the table, setting it if it does not exist.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param key the key
|
||||
* @param defaultValue the default value to set if key doesn't exist.
|
||||
* @returns False if the table key exists with a different type
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static bool SetDefaultString(wpi::StringRef key, wpi::StringRef defaultValue);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns the value at the specified key.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* If the key is not found, returns the default value.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param keyName the key
|
||||
* @return the value
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static std::string GetString(wpi::StringRef keyName,
|
||||
wpi::StringRef defaultValue);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Put a boolean array in the table.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param key the key to be assigned to
|
||||
* @param value the value that will be assigned
|
||||
* @return False if the table key already exists with a different type
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @note The array must be of int's rather than of bool's because
|
||||
* std::vector<bool> is special-cased in C++. 0 is false, any
|
||||
* non-zero value is true.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static bool PutBooleanArray(wpi::StringRef key, wpi::ArrayRef<int> value);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Gets the current value in the table, setting it if it does not exist.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param key the key
|
||||
* @param defaultValue the default value to set if key doesn't exist.
|
||||
* @returns False if the table key exists with a different type
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static bool SetDefaultBooleanArray(wpi::StringRef key,
|
||||
wpi::ArrayRef<int> defaultValue);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns the boolean array the key maps to.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* If the key does not exist or is of different type, it will return the
|
||||
* default value.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param key The key to look up.
|
||||
* @param defaultValue The value to be returned if no value is found.
|
||||
* @return the value associated with the given key or the given default value
|
||||
* if there is no value associated with the key
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @note This makes a copy of the array. If the overhead of this is a concern,
|
||||
* use GetValue() instead.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @note The returned array is std::vector<int> instead of std::vector<bool>
|
||||
* because std::vector<bool> is special-cased in C++. 0 is false, any
|
||||
* non-zero value is true.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static std::vector<int> GetBooleanArray(wpi::StringRef key,
|
||||
wpi::ArrayRef<int> defaultValue);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Put a number array in the table.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param key The key to be assigned to.
|
||||
* @param value The value that will be assigned.
|
||||
* @return False if the table key already exists with a different type
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static bool PutNumberArray(wpi::StringRef key, wpi::ArrayRef<double> value);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Gets the current value in the table, setting it if it does not exist.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param key The key.
|
||||
* @param defaultValue The default value to set if key doesn't exist.
|
||||
* @returns False if the table key exists with a different type
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static bool SetDefaultNumberArray(wpi::StringRef key,
|
||||
wpi::ArrayRef<double> defaultValue);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns the number array the key maps to.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* If the key does not exist or is of different type, it will return the
|
||||
* default value.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param key The key to look up.
|
||||
* @param defaultValue The value to be returned if no value is found.
|
||||
* @return the value associated with the given key or the given default value
|
||||
* if there is no value associated with the key
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @note This makes a copy of the array. If the overhead of this is a concern,
|
||||
* use GetValue() instead.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static std::vector<double> GetNumberArray(wpi::StringRef key,
|
||||
wpi::ArrayRef<double> defaultValue);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Put a string array in the table.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param key The key to be assigned to.
|
||||
* @param value The value that will be assigned.
|
||||
* @return False if the table key already exists with a different type
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static bool PutStringArray(wpi::StringRef key,
|
||||
wpi::ArrayRef<std::string> value);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Gets the current value in the table, setting it if it does not exist.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param key The key.
|
||||
* @param defaultValue The default value to set if key doesn't exist.
|
||||
* @returns False if the table key exists with a different type
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static bool SetDefaultStringArray(wpi::StringRef key,
|
||||
wpi::ArrayRef<std::string> defaultValue);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns the string array the key maps to.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* If the key does not exist or is of different type, it will return the
|
||||
* default value.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param key The key to look up.
|
||||
* @param defaultValue The value to be returned if no value is found.
|
||||
* @return the value associated with the given key or the given default value
|
||||
* if there is no value associated with the key
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @note This makes a copy of the array. If the overhead of this is a concern,
|
||||
* use GetValue() instead.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static std::vector<std::string> GetStringArray(
|
||||
wpi::StringRef key, wpi::ArrayRef<std::string> defaultValue);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Put a raw value (byte array) in the table.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param key The key to be assigned to.
|
||||
* @param value The value that will be assigned.
|
||||
* @return False if the table key already exists with a different type
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static bool PutRaw(wpi::StringRef key, wpi::StringRef value);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Gets the current value in the table, setting it if it does not exist.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param key The key.
|
||||
* @param defaultValue The default value to set if key doesn't exist.
|
||||
* @returns False if the table key exists with a different type
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static bool SetDefaultRaw(wpi::StringRef key, wpi::StringRef defaultValue);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Returns the raw value (byte array) the key maps to.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* If the key does not exist or is of different type, it will return the
|
||||
* default value.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param key The key to look up.
|
||||
* @param defaultValue The value to be returned if no value is found.
|
||||
* @return the value associated with the given key or the given default value
|
||||
* if there is no value associated with the key
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @note This makes a copy of the raw contents. If the overhead of this is a
|
||||
* concern, use GetValue() instead.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static std::string GetRaw(wpi::StringRef key, wpi::StringRef defaultValue);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Maps the specified key to the specified complex value (such as an array) in
|
||||
* this table.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The value can be retrieved by calling the RetrieveValue method with a key
|
||||
* that is equal to the original key.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param keyName the key
|
||||
* @param value the value
|
||||
* @return False if the table key already exists with a different type
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static bool PutValue(wpi::StringRef keyName,
|
||||
std::shared_ptr<nt::Value> value);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Gets the current value in the table, setting it if it does not exist.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param key the key
|
||||
* @param defaultValue The default value to set if key doesn't exist.
|
||||
* @returns False if the table key exists with a different type
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static bool SetDefaultValue(wpi::StringRef key,
|
||||
std::shared_ptr<nt::Value> defaultValue);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Retrieves the complex value (such as an array) in this table into the
|
||||
* complex data object.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param keyName the key
|
||||
* @param value the object to retrieve the value into
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static std::shared_ptr<nt::Value> GetValue(wpi::StringRef keyName);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Puts all sendable data to the dashboard.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void UpdateValues();
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -21,13 +21,67 @@ namespace frc {
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class Solenoid : public SolenoidBase {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Constructor using the default PCM ID (0).
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param channel The channel on the PCM to control (0..7).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit Solenoid(int channel);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Constructor.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param moduleNumber The CAN ID of the PCM the solenoid is attached to
|
||||
* @param channel The channel on the PCM to control (0..7).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
Solenoid(int moduleNumber, int channel);
|
||||
|
||||
~Solenoid() override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the value of a solenoid.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param on Turn the solenoid output off or on.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void Set(bool on);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Read the current value of the solenoid.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The current value of the solenoid.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual bool Get() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Check if solenoid is blacklisted.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* If a solenoid is shorted, it is added to the blacklist and
|
||||
* disabled until power cycle, or until faults are cleared.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @see ClearAllPCMStickyFaults()
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return If solenoid is disabled due to short.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsBlackListed() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the pulse duration in the PCM. This is used in conjunction with
|
||||
* the startPulse method to allow the PCM to control the timing of a pulse.
|
||||
* The timing can be controlled in 0.01 second increments.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param durationSeconds The duration of the pulse, from 0.01 to 2.55
|
||||
* seconds.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @see startPulse()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetPulseDuration(double durationSeconds);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Trigger the PCM to generate a pulse of the duration set in
|
||||
* setPulseDuration.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @see setPulseDuration()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void StartPulse();
|
||||
|
||||
void InitSendable(SendableBuilder& builder) override;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -18,19 +18,102 @@ namespace frc {
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class SolenoidBase : public ErrorBase, public SendableBase {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Read all 8 solenoids as a single byte
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param module the module to read from
|
||||
* @return The current value of all 8 solenoids on the module.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static int GetAll(int module);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Read all 8 solenoids as a single byte
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The current value of all 8 solenoids on the module.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetAll() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Reads complete solenoid blacklist for all 8 solenoids as a single byte.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* If a solenoid is shorted, it is added to the blacklist and
|
||||
* disabled until power cycle, or until faults are cleared.
|
||||
* @see ClearAllPCMStickyFaults()
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param module the module to read from
|
||||
* @return The solenoid blacklist of all 8 solenoids on the module.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static int GetPCMSolenoidBlackList(int module);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Reads complete solenoid blacklist for all 8 solenoids as a single byte.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* If a solenoid is shorted, it is added to the blacklist and
|
||||
* disabled until power cycle, or until faults are cleared.
|
||||
* @see ClearAllPCMStickyFaults()
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The solenoid blacklist of all 8 solenoids on the module.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetPCMSolenoidBlackList() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* @param module the module to read from
|
||||
* @return true if PCM sticky fault is set : The common highside solenoid
|
||||
* voltage rail is too low, most likely a solenoid channel is shorted.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static bool GetPCMSolenoidVoltageStickyFault(int module);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* @return true if PCM sticky fault is set : The common highside solenoid
|
||||
* voltage rail is too low, most likely a solenoid channel is shorted.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetPCMSolenoidVoltageStickyFault() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* @param module the module to read from
|
||||
* @return true if PCM is in fault state : The common highside solenoid
|
||||
* voltage rail is too low, most likely a solenoid channel is shorted.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static bool GetPCMSolenoidVoltageFault(int module);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* @return true if PCM is in fault state : The common highside solenoid
|
||||
* voltage rail is too low, most likely a solenoid channel is shorted.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetPCMSolenoidVoltageFault() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Clear ALL sticky faults inside PCM that Compressor is wired to.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* If a sticky fault is set, then it will be persistently cleared. Compressor
|
||||
* drive maybe momentarily disable while flags are being cleared. Care should
|
||||
* be taken to not call this too frequently, otherwise normal compressor
|
||||
* functionality may be prevented.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* If no sticky faults are set then this call will have no effect.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param module the module to read from
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void ClearAllPCMStickyFaults(int module);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Clear ALL sticky faults inside PCM that Compressor is wired to.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* If a sticky fault is set, then it will be persistently cleared. Compressor
|
||||
* drive maybe momentarily disable while flags are being cleared. Care should
|
||||
* be taken to not call this too frequently, otherwise normal compressor
|
||||
* functionality may be prevented.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* If no sticky faults are set then this call will have no effect.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void ClearAllPCMStickyFaults();
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Constructor.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param moduleNumber The CAN PCM ID.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit SolenoidBase(int pcmID);
|
||||
|
||||
static constexpr int m_maxModules = 63;
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -16,6 +16,12 @@ namespace frc {
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class Spark : public PWMSpeedController {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Constructor for a Spark.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param channel The PWM channel that the Spark is attached to. 0-9 are
|
||||
* on-board, 10-19 are on the MXP port
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit Spark(int channel);
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -19,14 +19,37 @@ namespace frc {
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class SynchronousPID : public PIDBase {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Allocate a PID object with the given constants for P, I, and D.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param Kp the proportional coefficient
|
||||
* @param Ki the integral coefficient
|
||||
* @param Kd the derivative coefficient
|
||||
* @param source The PIDSource object that is used to get values
|
||||
* @param output The PIDOutput object that is set to the output percentage
|
||||
*/
|
||||
SynchronousPID(double Kp, double Ki, double Kd, PIDSource& source,
|
||||
PIDOutput& output);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Allocate a PID object with the given constants for P, I, and D.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param Kp the proportional coefficient
|
||||
* @param Ki the integral coefficient
|
||||
* @param Kd the derivative coefficient
|
||||
* @param Kf the feed forward term
|
||||
* @param source The PIDSource object that is used to get values
|
||||
* @param output The PIDOutput object that is set to the output percentage
|
||||
*/
|
||||
SynchronousPID(double Kp, double Ki, double Kd, double Kf, PIDSource& source,
|
||||
PIDOutput& output);
|
||||
|
||||
SynchronousPID(const SynchronousPID&) = delete;
|
||||
SynchronousPID& operator=(const SynchronousPID) = delete;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Read the input, calculate the output accordingly, and write to the output.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Calculate() override;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -16,6 +16,12 @@ namespace frc {
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class Talon : public PWMSpeedController {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Constructor for a Talon (original or Talon SR).
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param channel The PWM channel number that the Talon is attached to. 0-9
|
||||
* are on-board, 10-19 are on the MXP port
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit Talon(int channel);
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -11,9 +11,48 @@
|
||||
|
||||
namespace frc {
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the thread priority for the specified thread.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param thread Reference to the thread to get the priority for.
|
||||
* @param isRealTime Set to true if thread is realtime, otherwise false.
|
||||
* @return The current thread priority. Scaled 1-99, with 1 being highest.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetThreadPriority(std::thread& thread, bool* isRealTime);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the thread priority for the current thread
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param isRealTime Set to true if thread is realtime, otherwise false.
|
||||
* @return The current thread priority. Scaled 1-99.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetCurrentThreadPriority(bool* isRealTime);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Sets the thread priority for the specified thread
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param thread Reference to the thread to set the priority of.
|
||||
* @param realTime Set to true to set a realtime priority, false for standard
|
||||
* priority.
|
||||
* @param priority Priority to set the thread to. Scaled 1-99, with 1 being
|
||||
* highest. On RoboRIO, priority is ignored for non realtime
|
||||
* setting.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The success state of setting the priority
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool SetThreadPriority(std::thread& thread, bool realTime, int priority);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Sets the thread priority for the current thread
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param realTime Set to true to set a realtime priority, false for standard
|
||||
* priority.
|
||||
* @param priority Priority to set the thread to. Scaled 1-99, with 1 being
|
||||
* highest. On RoboRIO, priority is ignored for non realtime
|
||||
* setting.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The success state of setting the priority
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool SetCurrentThreadPriority(bool realTime, int priority);
|
||||
|
||||
} // namespace frc
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -27,9 +27,25 @@ class TimedRobot : public IterativeRobotBase, public ErrorBase {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
static constexpr double kDefaultPeriod = 0.02;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Provide an alternate "main loop" via StartCompetition().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void StartCompetition() override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set time period between calls to Periodic() functions.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* A timer event is queued for periodic event notification. Each time the
|
||||
* interrupt occurs, the event will be immediately requeued for the same time
|
||||
* interval.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param period Period in seconds.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetPeriod(double seconds);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get time period between calls to Periodic() functions.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetPeriod() const;
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
@@ -48,6 +64,9 @@ class TimedRobot : public IterativeRobotBase, public ErrorBase {
|
||||
// The relative time
|
||||
double m_period = kDefaultPeriod;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Update the HAL alarm time.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void UpdateAlarm();
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -16,9 +16,33 @@ namespace frc {
|
||||
|
||||
typedef void (*TimerInterruptHandler)(void* param);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Pause the task for a specified time.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Pause the execution of the program for a specified period of time given in
|
||||
* seconds. Motors will continue to run at their last assigned values, and
|
||||
* sensors will continue to update. Only the task containing the wait will pause
|
||||
* until the wait time is expired.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param seconds Length of time to pause, in seconds.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Wait(double seconds);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Return the FPGA system clock time in seconds.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This is deprecated and just forwards to Timer::GetFPGATimestamp().
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Robot running time in seconds.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("Use Timer::GetFPGATimestamp() instead.")
|
||||
double GetClock();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* @brief Gives real-time clock system time with nanosecond resolution
|
||||
* @return The time, just in case you want the robot to start autonomous at 8pm
|
||||
* on Saturday.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetTime();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@@ -32,19 +56,88 @@ double GetTime();
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class Timer {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Create a new timer object.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Create a new timer object and reset the time to zero. The timer is
|
||||
* initially not running and must be started.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
Timer();
|
||||
|
||||
virtual ~Timer() = default;
|
||||
|
||||
Timer(const Timer&) = delete;
|
||||
Timer& operator=(const Timer&) = delete;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the current time from the timer. If the clock is running it is derived
|
||||
* from the current system clock the start time stored in the timer class. If
|
||||
* the clock is not running, then return the time when it was last stopped.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Current time value for this timer in seconds
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double Get() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Reset the timer by setting the time to 0.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Make the timer startTime the current time so new requests will be relative
|
||||
* to now.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Reset();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Start the timer running.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Just set the running flag to true indicating that all time requests should
|
||||
* be relative to the system clock.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Start();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Stop the timer.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This computes the time as of now and clears the running flag, causing all
|
||||
* subsequent time requests to be read from the accumulated time rather than
|
||||
* looking at the system clock.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Stop();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Check if the period specified has passed and if it has, advance the start
|
||||
* time by that period. This is useful to decide if it's time to do periodic
|
||||
* work without drifting later by the time it took to get around to checking.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param period The period to check for (in seconds).
|
||||
* @return True if the period has passed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasPeriodPassed(double period);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Return the FPGA system clock time in seconds.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Return the time from the FPGA hardware clock in seconds since the FPGA
|
||||
* started. Rolls over after 71 minutes.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @returns Robot running time in seconds.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static double GetFPGATimestamp();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Return the approximate match time.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The FMS does not send an official match time to the robots, but does send
|
||||
* an approximate match time. The value will count down the time remaining in
|
||||
* the current period (auto or teleop).
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Warning: This is not an official time (so it cannot be used to dispute ref
|
||||
* calls or guarantee that a function will trigger before the match ends).
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The Practice Match function of the DS approximates the behavior seen on the
|
||||
* field.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Time remaining in current match period (auto or teleop)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static double GetMatchTime();
|
||||
|
||||
// The time, in seconds, at which the 32-bit FPGA timestamp rolls over to 0
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -38,34 +38,165 @@ class Ultrasonic : public ErrorBase, public SendableBase, public PIDSource {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
enum DistanceUnit { kInches = 0, kMilliMeters = 1 };
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Create an instance of the Ultrasonic Sensor.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This is designed to support the Daventech SRF04 and Vex ultrasonic sensors.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param pingChannel The digital output channel that sends the pulse to
|
||||
* initiate the sensor sending the ping.
|
||||
* @param echoChannel The digital input channel that receives the echo. The
|
||||
* length of time that the echo is high represents the
|
||||
* round trip time of the ping, and the distance.
|
||||
* @param units The units returned in either kInches or kMilliMeters
|
||||
*/
|
||||
Ultrasonic(int pingChannel, int echoChannel, DistanceUnit units = kInches);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Create an instance of an Ultrasonic Sensor from a DigitalInput for the echo
|
||||
* channel and a DigitalOutput for the ping channel.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param pingChannel The digital output object that starts the sensor doing a
|
||||
* ping. Requires a 10uS pulse to start.
|
||||
* @param echoChannel The digital input object that times the return pulse to
|
||||
* determine the range.
|
||||
* @param units The units returned in either kInches or kMilliMeters
|
||||
*/
|
||||
Ultrasonic(DigitalOutput* pingChannel, DigitalInput* echoChannel,
|
||||
DistanceUnit units = kInches);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Create an instance of an Ultrasonic Sensor from a DigitalInput for the echo
|
||||
* channel and a DigitalOutput for the ping channel.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param pingChannel The digital output object that starts the sensor doing a
|
||||
* ping. Requires a 10uS pulse to start.
|
||||
* @param echoChannel The digital input object that times the return pulse to
|
||||
* determine the range.
|
||||
* @param units The units returned in either kInches or kMilliMeters
|
||||
*/
|
||||
Ultrasonic(DigitalOutput& pingChannel, DigitalInput& echoChannel,
|
||||
DistanceUnit units = kInches);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Create an instance of an Ultrasonic Sensor from a DigitalInput for the echo
|
||||
* channel and a DigitalOutput for the ping channel.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param pingChannel The digital output object that starts the sensor doing a
|
||||
* ping. Requires a 10uS pulse to start.
|
||||
* @param echoChannel The digital input object that times the return pulse to
|
||||
* determine the range.
|
||||
* @param units The units returned in either kInches or kMilliMeters
|
||||
*/
|
||||
Ultrasonic(std::shared_ptr<DigitalOutput> pingChannel,
|
||||
std::shared_ptr<DigitalInput> echoChannel,
|
||||
DistanceUnit units = kInches);
|
||||
Ultrasonic(int pingChannel, int echoChannel, DistanceUnit units = kInches);
|
||||
|
||||
~Ultrasonic() override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Single ping to ultrasonic sensor.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Send out a single ping to the ultrasonic sensor. This only works if
|
||||
* automatic (round robin) mode is disabled. A single ping is sent out, and
|
||||
* the counter should count the semi-period when it comes in. The counter is
|
||||
* reset to make the current value invalid.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Ping();
|
||||
bool IsRangeValid() const;
|
||||
static void SetAutomaticMode(bool enabling);
|
||||
double GetRangeInches() const;
|
||||
double GetRangeMM() const;
|
||||
bool IsEnabled() const { return m_enabled; }
|
||||
void SetEnabled(bool enable) { m_enabled = enable; }
|
||||
|
||||
double PIDGet() override;
|
||||
void SetPIDSourceType(PIDSourceType pidSource) override;
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Check if there is a valid range measurement.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The ranges are accumulated in a counter that will increment on each edge of
|
||||
* the echo (return) signal. If the count is not at least 2, then the range
|
||||
* has not yet been measured, and is invalid.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsRangeValid() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Turn Automatic mode on/off.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* When in Automatic mode, all sensors will fire in round robin, waiting a set
|
||||
* time between each sensor.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param enabling Set to true if round robin scheduling should start for all
|
||||
* the ultrasonic sensors. This scheduling method assures that
|
||||
* the sensors are non-interfering because no two sensors fire
|
||||
* at the same time. If another scheduling algorithm is
|
||||
* prefered, it can be implemented by pinging the sensors
|
||||
* manually and waiting for the results to come back.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void SetAutomaticMode(bool enabling);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the range in inches from the ultrasonic sensor.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Range in inches of the target returned from the ultrasonic sensor.
|
||||
* If there is no valid value yet, i.e. at least one measurement
|
||||
* hasn't completed, then return 0.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetRangeInches() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the range in millimeters from the ultrasonic sensor.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Range in millimeters of the target returned by the ultrasonic
|
||||
* sensor. If there is no valid value yet, i.e. at least one
|
||||
* measurement hasn't completed, then return 0.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetRangeMM() const;
|
||||
|
||||
bool IsEnabled() const;
|
||||
|
||||
void SetEnabled(bool enable);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Set the current DistanceUnit that should be used for the PIDSource base
|
||||
* object.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param units The DistanceUnit that should be used.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetDistanceUnits(DistanceUnit units);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the current DistanceUnit that is used for the PIDSource base object.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The type of DistanceUnit that is being used.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
DistanceUnit GetDistanceUnits() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the range in the current DistanceUnit for the PIDSource base object.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The range in DistanceUnit
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double PIDGet() override;
|
||||
|
||||
void SetPIDSourceType(PIDSourceType pidSource) override;
|
||||
|
||||
void InitSendable(SendableBuilder& builder) override;
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Initialize the Ultrasonic Sensor.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This is the common code that initializes the ultrasonic sensor given that
|
||||
* there are two digital I/O channels allocated. If the system was running in
|
||||
* automatic mode (round robin) when the new sensor is added, it is stopped,
|
||||
* the sensor is added, then automatic mode is restored.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Initialize();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Background task that goes through the list of ultrasonic sensors and pings
|
||||
* each one in turn. The counter is configured to read the timing of the
|
||||
* returned echo pulse.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* DANGER WILL ROBINSON, DANGER WILL ROBINSON:
|
||||
* This code runs as a task and assumes that none of the ultrasonic sensors
|
||||
* will change while it's running. Make sure to disable automatic mode before
|
||||
* touching the list.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void UltrasonicChecker();
|
||||
|
||||
// Time (sec) for the ping trigger pulse.
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -36,32 +36,92 @@
|
||||
wpi_assertNotEqual_impl(a, b, #a, #b, message, __FILE__, __LINE__, \
|
||||
__FUNCTION__)
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Assert implementation.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This allows breakpoints to be set on an assert. The users don't call this,
|
||||
* but instead use the wpi_assert macros in Utility.h.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool wpi_assert_impl(bool conditionValue, const wpi::Twine& conditionText,
|
||||
const wpi::Twine& message, wpi::StringRef fileName,
|
||||
int lineNumber, wpi::StringRef funcName);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Assert equal implementation.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This determines whether the two given integers are equal. If not, the value
|
||||
* of each is printed along with an optional message string. The users don't
|
||||
* call this, but instead use the wpi_assertEqual macros in Utility.h.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool wpi_assertEqual_impl(int valueA, int valueB,
|
||||
const wpi::Twine& valueAString,
|
||||
const wpi::Twine& valueBString,
|
||||
const wpi::Twine& message, wpi::StringRef fileName,
|
||||
int lineNumber, wpi::StringRef funcName);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Assert not equal implementation.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This determines whether the two given integers are equal. If so, the value of
|
||||
* each is printed along with an optional message string. The users don't call
|
||||
* this, but instead use the wpi_assertNotEqual macros in Utility.h.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool wpi_assertNotEqual_impl(int valueA, int valueB,
|
||||
const wpi::Twine& valueAString,
|
||||
const wpi::Twine& valueBString,
|
||||
const wpi::Twine& message, wpi::StringRef fileName,
|
||||
int lineNumber, wpi::StringRef funcName);
|
||||
|
||||
void wpi_suspendOnAssertEnabled(bool enabled);
|
||||
|
||||
namespace frc {
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Return the FPGA Version number.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* For now, expect this to be competition year.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return FPGA Version number.
|
||||
* @deprecated Use RobotController static class method
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("Use RobotController static class method")
|
||||
int GetFPGAVersion();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Return the FPGA Revision number.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The format of the revision is 3 numbers. The 12 most significant bits are the
|
||||
* Major Revision. The next 8 bits are the Minor Revision. The 12 least
|
||||
* significant bits are the Build Number.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return FPGA Revision number.
|
||||
* @deprecated Use RobotController static class method
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("Use RobotController static class method")
|
||||
int64_t GetFPGARevision();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Read the microsecond-resolution timer on the FPGA.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The current time in microseconds according to the FPGA (since FPGA
|
||||
* reset).
|
||||
* @deprecated Use RobotController static class method
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("Use RobotController static class method")
|
||||
uint64_t GetFPGATime();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the state of the "USER" button on the roboRIO.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return True if the button is currently pressed down
|
||||
* @deprecated Use RobotController static class method
|
||||
*/
|
||||
WPI_DEPRECATED("Use RobotController static class method")
|
||||
bool GetUserButton();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get a stack trace, ignoring the first "offset" symbols.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param offset The number of symbols at the top of the stack to ignore
|
||||
*/
|
||||
std::string GetStackTrace(int offset);
|
||||
|
||||
} // namespace frc
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -19,6 +19,12 @@ namespace frc {
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class Victor : public PWMSpeedController {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Constructor for a Victor.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param channel The PWM channel number that the Victor is attached to. 0-9
|
||||
* are on-board, 10-19 are on the MXP port
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit Victor(int channel);
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -16,6 +16,12 @@ namespace frc {
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class VictorSP : public PWMSpeedController {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Constructor for a VictorSP.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param channel The PWM channel that the VictorSP is attached to. 0-9 are
|
||||
* on-board, 10-19 are on the MXP port
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit VictorSP(int channel);
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -22,46 +22,214 @@ namespace frc {
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class XboxController : public GenericHID {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Construct an instance of an Xbox controller.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The controller index is the USB port on the Driver Station.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param port The port on the Driver Station that the controller is plugged
|
||||
* into (0-5).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
explicit XboxController(int port);
|
||||
|
||||
virtual ~XboxController() = default;
|
||||
|
||||
XboxController(const XboxController&) = delete;
|
||||
XboxController& operator=(const XboxController&) = delete;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the X axis value of the controller.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param hand Side of controller whose value should be returned.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetX(JoystickHand hand) const override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the Y axis value of the controller.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param hand Side of controller whose value should be returned.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetY(JoystickHand hand) const override;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Get the trigger axis value of the controller.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param hand Side of controller whose value should be returned.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetTriggerAxis(JoystickHand hand) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Read the value of the bumper button on the controller.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param hand Side of controller whose value should be returned.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetBumper(JoystickHand hand) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Whether the bumper was pressed since the last check.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param hand Side of controller whose value should be returned.
|
||||
* @return Whether the button was pressed since the last check.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetBumperPressed(JoystickHand hand);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Whether the bumper was released since the last check.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param hand Side of controller whose value should be returned.
|
||||
* @return Whether the button was released since the last check.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetBumperReleased(JoystickHand hand);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Read the value of the stick button on the controller.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param hand Side of controller whose value should be returned.
|
||||
* @return The state of the button.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetStickButton(JoystickHand hand) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Whether the stick button was pressed since the last check.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param hand Side of controller whose value should be returned.
|
||||
* @return Whether the button was pressed since the last check.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetStickButtonPressed(JoystickHand hand);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Whether the stick button was released since the last check.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param hand Side of controller whose value should be returned.
|
||||
* @return Whether the button was released since the last check.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetStickButtonReleased(JoystickHand hand);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Read the value of the A button on the controller.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The state of the button.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetAButton() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Whether the A button was pressed since the last check.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Whether the button was pressed since the last check.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetAButtonPressed();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Whether the A button was released since the last check.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Whether the button was released since the last check.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetAButtonReleased();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Read the value of the B button on the controller.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The state of the button.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetBButton() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Whether the B button was pressed since the last check.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Whether the button was pressed since the last check.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetBButtonPressed();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Whether the B button was released since the last check.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Whether the button was released since the last check.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetBButtonReleased();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Read the value of the X button on the controller.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The state of the button.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetXButton() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Whether the X button was pressed since the last check.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Whether the button was pressed since the last check.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetXButtonPressed();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Whether the X button was released since the last check.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Whether the button was released since the last check.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetXButtonReleased();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Read the value of the Y button on the controller.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return The state of the button.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetYButton() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Whether the Y button was pressed since the last check.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Whether the button was pressed since the last check.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetYButtonPressed();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Whether the Y button was released since the last check.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Whether the button was released since the last check.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetYButtonReleased();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Whether the Y button was released since the last check.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Whether the button was released since the last check.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetBackButton() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Whether the back button was pressed since the last check.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Whether the button was pressed since the last check.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetBackButtonPressed();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Whether the back button was released since the last check.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Whether the button was released since the last check.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetBackButtonReleased();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Read the value of the start button on the controller.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @param hand Side of controller whose value should be returned.
|
||||
* @return The state of the button.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetStartButton() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Whether the start button was pressed since the last check.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Whether the button was pressed since the last check.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetStartButtonPressed();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Whether the start button was released since the last check.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* @return Whether the button was released since the last check.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetStartButtonReleased();
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
|
||||
Reference in New Issue
Block a user